Home

User's Guide

1. Paper size Dimensions Standard Optional Optional Multipurpose Duplexer 550 sheet tray 550 sheet tray 2 000 sheet feeder Tray 1 tray Folio 215 9 x 330 2 mm y y X V y 8 5 x 13 in Statement 139 7 x 215 9 mm y y X y y 5 5 x 8 5 in Universal 148 x 210 mmto y y X y y Note Turn size 2159x 355 6 mw sensing off to 5 83 x 8 27 in to support 8 5x 14 in universal sizes 76 2 x127 mm X X X Jy X that are close to 3x 5 in to standard media 215 9 x 355 6 sizes mm 8 5 x 14 in 76 2 x 127 mm X X X y X 3x5 in to 215 9 x 914 4 mm 8 5 x 36 in 76 2 x 127 mm X X X y X 3x5 in to 215 9 x 1219 2 mm 8 5 x 48 in 73 4Envelope 98 4x190 5 mm X X X y X Monarch 3 875 x 7 5 in 9 Envelope 98 4x226 1 mm X X X y X 3 875 x 8 9 in Com 10 104 8 x 241 3 mm X X X y X Envelope 4 12 x 9 5 in DL Envelope 110 x 220 mm X X X y X 4 33 x 8 66 in C5 Envelope 162 x 229 mm X X X y X 6 38 x 9 01 in B5 Envelope 176 x 250 mm X X X y X 6 93 x 9 84 in Other Envelope 85 7 x165 mmto X X X 4 X 215 9 x 355 6 mm 3 375 x 6 50 in to 8 5 x 14 in 1 Supported by X790 models only This formats the envelope size setting for 215 9 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 in unless the size is specified by the software application NS Paper and specialty media guidelines 90 Supported paper types and weights The printer supports 60 176 g m 16 47 Ib paper weights for one sided printing Two sided printing
2. M AA dat 119 PElisccernr PER 119 ao SNA 119 PIU A E ct 120 Scan PREM ds 120 Advanced O A AES a voee aget a edad 120 FANT Gy osi ds vir even PUDE REA dois Gases teva NUI E eer E NP UR A Getting the printer ready to faX ccccccccsssccceceeccesesessssesneeeceecesseseseesesnensaeeseeeesesceeeessesususauauaussusaasaaesees 121 Initial fax Setup eee pe dte dc 122 Choosing a fax connectlOr tenete tr teer daa caia 123 Connecting to an analog telephone line esses eene nennen nennen enne nnne nnn nennen nennen 123 Connecting to I DS Service cede ede tends Petites a di Seesuanuautes teaea cd a aede EX TP da 124 Connecting to a PBX or ISDN Systemic ni aeeiiaii eiris ian eiia aE Eai a Ei a Eai a 124 Connecting to a distinctive ring service ssssssssssesssssssssrssssssressssssreressresssssrestessereeeessseeresssssreeoteesssrreressssent 125 Connecting to an adapter for your country or region esses eene enne enne nennen nnn tnis 125 Setting the outgoing fax or station name and number esses entente ennt nen nien ener 126 Setting the date and time iio e eee ere ere ie iaaa iaar eaaa a iienaa Nerina 126 Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time esent eene ener 127 Creating Shortcuts aii A IA da 127 Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server ccooooooccccncnnooocnnccnononnncnnononononnncncnnnnnnnos 127 Creating a fax desti
3. 144 eN ASETI o AE tereti co bre ees et eebes ee beet eee oo Se nea Ta basa ee SA RYE DERE 144 SCalPFeVIew scceoscemotettes to tete el tt et RR RR HS 144 Advanced ODtIOns onde er eee e e vet A vectis eee der eo en 144 Understanding printer menus eee eee e eee e eee e eene e eene onse s eee eL AED MTTEAIE ee 145 Supplies mieru 2 2 reni RAN 146 Paper MENU EP 148 Default Source menu eet ae t e atte ceat dide 148 Paper Size PE MENU AA einem te eter AA idee dest teer e equa 148 Configure MP Menu pCE 151 Substitute ZE MU eio ete ads cete ee ee aec en ee ees 152 Paper T Oxture MON aioin nii eiieeii Rinni ieia A ESERE At A A eves 152 Paper Weight Menu umi iii 154 PaperiLoading menu s e t eade et Ria 155 Custom Types MENU eet iced A eene uen era aree eie ca gen gera eo eene Eun rung teeta e AA 157 Custom Nas MENU ederet retener ER a it e pee n Pe ger EO ARA 157 Custom BinNamies mielblus i ucc deter tr A A yate dudo s Te ense ad 158 CUSTOMISCAN Sizes melli eee ie kE EA A teas ooo ei e ned ra nea ae rana Ye Apnd vs a R VS cda 158 Universal Setup MENU iii iia 158 Bin SUP MA AS AA A a di aa 159 Reports MENU cs seve a A eA 160 Reports MENU A A A did 160 NetWwork Ports MENU A A A dS adel 161 Active IN EAU A A AA A EA a eee 161 Standard Network or Network x MenuS ccccccccnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnconncnnncncnoncnnnnnnnnnn nro nnnnnncnconnnnrnnnnnnn n
4. sss esee 115 Creating an e mail shortcut using the touch screen cceesesseceecessssececesesesseeeceessasseeeeseeseeeeeseesueeesessessaaaaes 115 Contents 6 E miailing a doc tmet iecore ei beret nera toa ehe bead dab eR uh ce Uy a de HET rr deua sida 116 Sending an e mail using the touch screen ccsscceceesssscecesseesseececessenseeesceeseececsseesueeceseseeeseeeeeses asaini nenne 116 Sending an e mail using a shortcut number ccccsscccccsssssscecesceesseeceeessessseececsessesecsesaseeecesssssseeeeseessaeeeeees 116 Sending an e mail using the address book 0 ceeeeceesceceeseeeceeseeecesneeceeaeeecesecesuaeeseauaeceeaaeeseauaeseeaaeeseeeaeeeaeeeea 116 Customizing e mail settings e ere ento nate nth e ER a nna ea ta eee AERE Ta reta a Ye PAR eR Fara tee e ERU ees eo PRA daa 117 Adding e mail subject and message information esses eene enne 117 Changing the output file types ici die cti eR Da dte d diese eer 117 Ganceling ari esmiall oir ie A A dee A ee R 118 Understanding e mail Options ccscscsscccccccsssssssseceeceecesseessessuseseeceessessesesaeeseescesceesussssssasesesaeeesesesees 118 RECIDICN IS ELLE 118 S bject uses ste n HR e a ETE ttd ies m m he ee 118 MESS ist dede ao did 118 Ele NM Wa EE 118 QriginaliSize ii A eee eee ew de dee es 118 ace c lan acdevenagiadin ns 119 COLON EP E 119 COMTOM om
5. SMTP Timeout Specifies the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to 5 30 send an e mail Note 30 seconds is the factory default setting Reply Address Specifies a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e mail sent by the V printer y Understanding printer menus z Use SSL Disabled Negotiate Required Menu item 174 Description Sets the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the SMTP server Notes Disabled is the factory default setting When the Negotiate setting is used the SMTP server determines if SSL will be used SMTP Server Authentication No authentication required Login Plain CRAM MD5 Digest MD5 NTLM Kerberos 5 Specifies the type of user authentication required for scan to e mail privileges Note No authentication required is the factory default setting Device Initiated E mail None Use Device SMTP Credentials User Initiated E mail None Use Device SMTP Credentials Use Session User ID amp Password Use Session E mail address amp Password Prompt User Device Userid Device Password Kerberos 5 Realm NTLM Domain Specifies what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP server Some SMTP servers require credentials to send an e mail Notes None is the factory default setting for Device and User Initiated E mail Device Userid and Device Password are used to l
6. 11 Tighten the long thumbscrew Warning Potential Damage Do not overtighten the thumbscrew 12 Insert the plug of the ISP interface cable into the receptacle of the system board Note The plugs and receptacles are color coded Additional printer setup 46 13 Reattach the system board cover Installing a printer hard disk Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the system board For more information see Accessing the system board on page 35 2 Unpack the printer hard disk Additional printer setup 47 3 Locate the appropriate connector on the system board Note If an optional ISP is currently installed then the printer hard disk must be installed onto the ISP To install a printer hard disk onto the ISP a Using a flathead screwdriver loosen the screws b Remove the screws attached to the printer hard di
7. On Reduce printer noise Print jobs will process at a reduced speed Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print There will be a short delay before the first page is printed f your printer has faxing capability fax sounds are reduced or disabled including those made by the fax speaker and ringer The fax is placed in standby mode The alarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are turned off The printer will ignore the Advance Start command Adjusting Sleep Mode To save energy you can decrease the number of minutes before the printer enters Sleep Mode Available settings range from 1 240 minutes The factory default setting is 30 minutes Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Timeouts 3 In the Sleep Mode field enter the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to amp Settings General Settings Timeouts 2 Touch the arrows next to Sleep Mode to select the number of minutes
8. 30 min is the factory default setting Disabled appears only when Energy Conserve is set to Off Lower settings conserve more energy but may require longer warm up times Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use Under most circumstances this keeps the printer ready to print with minimum warm up time Timeouts Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before returning to a Ready state Note 30 sec is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus Menu item Timeouts Print Timeout 186 Description Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an end of job message before canceling the remainder of the print job Disabled 1 255 sec Notes 90 sec is the factory default setting When the timer expires any partially printed page still in the printer is printed and then the printer checks to see if any new print jobs are waiting Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs Timeouts Setsthe amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional Wait Timeout data before canceling a print job 15 65535 sec Notes Disabled e 40 sec is the factory default setting Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using PostScript emulation This setting has no effect on PCL emulation print jobs Timeouts Sets the amount of time in seconds the p
9. Resource Save Off On Specifies how the printer handles temporary downloads such as fonts and macros stored in RAM when the printer receives a print job that requires more memory than is available Notes Offisthe factory default setting Off sets the printer to retain downloads only until memory is needed Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs Onsets the printer to retain downloads during language changes and printer resets If the printer runs out of memory 38 Memory Full appears but downloads are not deleted Print All Order Alphabetical Oldest First Newest First Specifies the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed when Print All is selected Notes Alphabetical is the factory default setting Print jobs always appear in alphabetical order on the printer control panel Understanding printer menus Job Accounting menu 223 Note This menu item appears only if a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed The printer hard disk cannot be read write or write protected Menu item Job Accounting Log Off On Description Determines if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives Note Off is the factory default setting Job Accounting Utilities Lets you print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive Accounting Log Frequency Monthly Weekly Determines how often a log file is created Note Mont
10. Sleep is the factory default setting Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower power configuration Ifthe printer is in Sleep Mode then the touch screen appears off and the Sleep button turns amber in color Touch anywhere on the touch screen or press a button on the printer control panel to exit Sleep Mode Ifthe printer is in Hibernate mode then the touch screen is completely off and the Sleep button turns amber in color and is blinking Press and Hold Sleep Button Do nothing Sleep Hibernate Determines how the printer while in Idle state reacts to a long press of the Sleep button Notes Do Nothing is the factory default setting Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower power configuration e Ifthe printer is in Sleep Mode then the touch screen appears off and the Sleep button turns amber in color Press and hold the Sleep button for 3 seconds or longer to enter Hibernate mode Touch anywhere on the touch screen or press a button on the printer control panel to exit Sleep Mode Factory Defaults Do Not Restore Restore Now Returns the printer settings to the factory default settings Notes Do Not Restore is the factory default setting Do Not Restore keeps the user defined settings Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory default settings except Network Ports menu settings All downloads stored in RAM are deleted Downloads
11. Understanding printer menus Menu item Enhance Fine Lines 227 Description Enables a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings maps electrical Off circuit diagrams and flow charts On Notes e Off is the factory default setting You can set this option from the software program For Windows users click File Print Properties Preferences Options or Setup For Macintosh users choose File gt Print and then adjust the settings from the print dialog and pop up menus To set Enhance Fine Lines using the Embedded Web Server type the network printer IP address in a browser window Color Saver Reduces the amount of toner used for graphics and images The amount of toner used Off for text is not reduced On Notes Offis the factory default setting On overrides Toner Darkness settings RGB Brightness 6to 6 Adjusts brightness in color outputs Notes Ois the factory default setting e 6 is the maximum decrease 6 is the maximum increase This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used RGB Contrast 0 5 Adjusts contrast in color outputs Notes Ois the factory default setting This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used RGB Saturation 0 5 Adjusts saturation in color outputs Notes Ois the factory default setting This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications a
12. 2 Grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out 3 Close the side door 4 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared 250 paper jam 1 Push the paper pick tab and then remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder Warning Potential Damage Pulling the paper out without pushing the paper pick tab first may cause the paper pick tab to break Clearing jams 264 2 Grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Reload paper into the multipurpose feeder and then adjust the paper guides 4 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared 280 289 paper jams 1 Remove all original documents from the ADF 2 Open the ADF cover 3 Grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 4 Close the ADF cover 5 Reload original documents into the ADF straighten the stack and then adjust the paper guide 6 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared Clearing jams 265 290 292 paper jams 290 paper jam Close the ADF cover 291 paper jam Close the scanner glass cover 292 paper jam Try one of more of the following Close the ADF cover Close the scanner cover Contact your system support system person 400 403 and 460 461 paper jams 1 Open the paper transport unit door 2 Firmly gra
13. Note The tree view supports only bookmarks created from this function and not from any other application Held Jobs Display all current held jobs Understanding the home screen 25 Other buttons that may appear on the home screen Touch ae Search held jobs Search on any of the following items User name for held or confidential print jobs Job names for held jobs excluding confidential print jobs Profile names Bookmark container or print job names USB container or print job names for supported file types Release Held Fax Access the list of held faxes Note This button appears only when there are held faxes with a scheduled hold time previously set Lock Device Open a password entry screen Enter the correct password to lock the printer control panel Note This button appears only when the printer is unlocked and password has been set Unlock Device Open a password entry screen Enter the correct password to unlock the printer control panel Note This button appears only when the printer is locked The printer control panel buttons and shortcuts cannot be used while this appears Cancel Jobs Open the Cancel Jobs screen The Cancel Jobs screen shows three headings Print Fax and Network The following options are available under the Print Fax and Network headings Print job Copy job Fax profile e FTP e E mail send Each heading has a list of jobs shown in
14. Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by selecting a setting from the Multipage printing N Up section of the Print dialog screen Check your first draft for accuracy Before printing or making multiple copies of a document Usethe preview feature which you can select from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar to see how the document will look like before you print it Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy Avoid paper jams Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams For more information see Avoiding jams on page 257 Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 69 Print in black and white To print all text and graphics using only the black print cartridge set the printer to Black Only For more information see Printing in black and white on page 93 Saving energy Using Eco Mode 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Eco Mode gt select a setting gt Submit Choose Ke Off Use factory d
15. Placing information on copies Placing the date and time at the top of each page 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Advanced Options gt Header Footer 4 Pick an area of the page where you want to place the date and time 5 Touch Yes or No v gt Copy It Placing an overlay message on each page An overlay message can be placed on each page The message choices are Urgent Confidential Copy Custom or Draft To place a message on the copies 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy Advanced Options Overlay select overlay message ZS 4 Touch Copy It Canceling a copy job Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF When the ADF begins processing a document the scanning screen appears To cance
16. ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation ITC Bookman International Typeface Corporation ITC Mona Lisa International Typeface Corporation ITC Zapf Chancery International Typeface Corporation Joanna The Monotype Corporation plc Marigold Arthur Baker Monaco Apple Computer Inc New York Apple Computer Inc Oxford Arthur Baker Notices 321 Palatino Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Stempel Garamond Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Taffy Agfa Corporation Times New Roman The Monotype Corporation plc Univers Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries J All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners AirPrint AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc Federal Communications Commission FCC compliance information statement This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energ
17. IVIAKE SURE THERE IS NOT TOO MUCH PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY Make sure the stack of paper you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray or on the multipurpose feeder CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY Load paper from a fresh package Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared CHECK THE PAPER PATH The paper path is not clear Clear jammed paper from the entire paper path and then touch Continue Jammed pages are not reprinted Turn ON Jam RECOVERY 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Print Recovery 2 Touch the arrows next to Jam Recovery until On or Auto appears 3 Touch Submit Troubleshooting 303 Solving print quality problems If these suggestions do not correct the problem then contact customer support You may have a printer part that requires adjustment or replacement Characters have jagged or uneven edges If you are using downloaded fonts verify that the fonts are supported by the printer the host computer and the software program Clipped images Try one or more of the following CHECK THE GUIDES Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper
18. 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt Mixed Sizes gt ZS gt Copy to gt Auto Size Match gt ZS gt Copy It The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document Example 2 Copying on a single paper size 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt Mixed Sizes gt ZS gt Copy to gt Letter gt ZS gt Copy It The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned and then scales the mixed paper sizes to fit on the paper size selected Copying on both sides of the paper duplexing 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scann
19. ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings Getting the printer ready to fax The following connection methods may not be applicable in all countries or regions Note During the initial printer setup deselect Fax and any other function you plan to set up later and then touch Continue The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections such as the fax feature power cord or telephone during a lightning storm Warning Potential Damage Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or receiving a fax Faxing 122 Initial fax setup Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission station name identification of the business other entity or individual sending the message and station number telephone number of the sending fax machine business other entity or individual To enter your fax setup information use the printer control panel or use your browser to access the Embedded Web S
20. All but first page Custom text Specifies header footer information for the middle of the page Notes Off is the factory default setting for Top middle All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Header Footer Top right Top right Off Date Time Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Custom text Specifies header footer information for the top right of the page Notes e Off is the factory default setting for Top right All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Understanding printer menus 192 z Menu item Description Header Footer Specifies header footer information for the bottom left of the page Bottom left Notes Bottom left Off e Off is the factory default setting for Bottom left Date Time All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Custom text Header Footer Specifies header footer information for the bottom middle of the page Bottom middle Notes Bottom middle Off e Off is the factory default setting for Bottom middle Date Time All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Custom text Header Footer Specifies header footer information for the bottom right of the page Bottom right
21. JIS BS Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes Sides Duplex Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on a page off Notes Long edge Short edge Off is the factory default setting Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrai and left edge for landscape JPEG Quality Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality Best for content 5 90 Notes Best for content is the factory default setting e 5 reduces the file size but the quality of the image is lessened 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large This menu setting applies to all scan functions Text Default 5 90 Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 75 is the factory default setting Text Photo Default 5 90 Sets the quality of a text photo image in relation to file size and the quality Note 75 is the factory default setting Photo Default 5 90 Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality Note 50 is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus Menu item Use Multi Page TIFF On Off 218 Description Provides a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan
22. Menu item Description Custom x Loading Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that Off specify Custom x as the paper type Duplex Notes e Off is the factory default setting Custom x Loading is available only if the custom paper type is supported Notes Duplex sets the printer default to 2 sided printing for every print job unless 1 sided printing is selected from Print Properties f Duplex is selected then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit including 1 sided print jobs NS M Custom Types menu Custom Type x Associates a paper or specialty media type with a factory default Custom Paper Type x name ora user defined Custom Name created from the Embedded Card Stock Web Server or from MarkVision Professional Transparency Notes ms Paper is the factory default setting Rough Cotton f Labels The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source Vinyl Labels Envelope Recycled Specifies a paper type when the Recycled setting is selected in other menus Paper Notes Card Stock Transparency Paper is the factory default setting Glossy The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or Rough Cotton multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source Labels Vinyl Labels Envelope NS y Custom Names menu Definition Custom Name x Specify a custom na
23. S Securing the memory before moving the printer 237 Securing the memory before moving the printer Statement of Volatility Your printer contains various types of memory that are capable of storing device and network settings information from embedded solutions and user data The types of memory along with the types of data stored by each are described below Volatile memory Your device utilizes standard Random Access Memory RAM to temporarily buffer user data during simple print and copy jobs Non volatile memory Your device may utilize two forms of non volatile memory EEPROM and NAND flash memory Both types are used to store the operating system device settings network information scanner and bookmark settings and embedded solutions Hard disk memory Some devices have a hard disk drive installed The printer hard disk is designed for device specific functionality and cannot be used for long term storage for data that is not print related The hard disk does not provide the capability for users to extract information create folders create disk or network file shares or FTP information directly from a client device The hard disk can retain buffered user data from complex scan print copy and fax jobs as well as form data and font data There are several circumstances under which you might wish to erase the contents of the memory devices installed in your printer A partial list includes The printer is
24. Touching Copy to or Copy from after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto 5 Touch Copy It Adjusting copy quality 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy Content 4 Touch the button that best represents the content type of the document you are copying Text Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphic Use when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Text Photo Use when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Photo Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image 5 Touch v 6 Touch the button that best represents the content source of the document you are copying Color Laser Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Use when the original document was printed using a black white laser printer Inkjet Use when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer Copying 107 Photo Film Use when the original document is a photo from film
25. cccconocccccnnononnnnnnnnnnonnnonnnnnnancnonananannnnnos 245 Checking the status of supplies from a network computer oooooocccncconocnncnonaonnnnncnonnnnnnnonnnononnnncnonononononanannn ens 245 Ordering supplies stas 246 Ordering a print cartridge s ic re pee eee ee ena eade e ea elas 246 Contents 10 Ordering a fuser or a transfer modulen anr caie iaeaea iid aia aaa anarad e i raer aaa E aeea ariii Eia 246 Ordering a waste toner bottle uude ate ee ee a ete 247 Ordering staple cartridges 1 t cd toti tentabat eec been etna ntes 247 Ordering an ADE kit endete m cat recte d ege ys pcd veo aateeediy edite rete muda 247 Ordering a cleaning kit reete A ci 247 Replacing supplies ettet dia Eds TRE CN ETE REG 248 Replacing a printcartridge scannen eiii iaa e iaei reier e iaaii ai aAA Eaa AE sr Saai Ea nasi seen nass 248 Replacing the waste toner bottles ciclos dal 251 Moving tlie prititer ire reden De eee UE eee ot aee E Dee ere vh ated eA DET Pe Ee RG Peas Ns 252 Before moving the printer tro tee Rettore dde e ee ee eee E dod ec fuos 252 Moving the printer to another lOcation cccccccssescccesesssseeccesssssecesseesseeeecesssssseecesesssaeeeseseseusees reser nennen 253 Shipping the printer inssi ite Lir ec Dec e Einer a EUER acids add E e a du ee dac ideada diia 253 Administrative SupDOTt ios eo er dh Renee aano Pea en ebea vh eh tedster seeds vene brass LIA Finding advanced networking and admin
26. gt Manual Feeder Type gt ZS gt Copy It Copying on letterhead 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt size of the original document gt Copy to gt Manual Feeder Copying 104 4 Place the letterhead faceup top edge first in the multipurpose feeder 5 Select the size of the letterhead 6 Navigate to Continue gt Letterhead gt Continue gt Copy It Customizing copy settings Copying in black and white 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Allow color copies gt Off gt ZS gt Submit Copying to a different size 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or
27. nt lasers teily on varottava kun v rikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki V lt s teelle altistumista Gefahr Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre Laserstrahl meiden Kiv uvos Adparn axrivoBodia A I Ep rav aqaipo vrai oi KAJ TE KAI ouberep yverai N evSaop dela Amog yere TNV Geon OTN IN TWV AKT VUV Figyelem A kazett k kiv telekor l thatatlan l zersug rz s l phet fel ha a biztons gi kapcsol nem m k dik Ker lj k el a l zersugarat Pericolo Emissione di radiazioni laser durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco Evitare l esposizione ai raggi Fare Usynlig laserstr ling n r kassetter tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill Unng eksponering Niebezpiecze stwo niewidoczne promieniowanie laserowe po wyj ciu kasety i wy czeniu blokady Unika ekspozycji na wi zk OnacHo Mpu cHsreix kaptpuaxax n HapyLieHun nkcaynn HeBnauMoe rnasy nasepHoe usnyyeHve VsGeraite BosqevicTana nyua Pozor Nebezpe enstvo nevidite n ho laserov ho iarenia pri odobrat ch kazet ch a odblokovanej poistke Nevystavujte sa l om Peligro Se producen radiaciones l ser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado Evite la exposici n al haz de l ser Varning Osynlig laserstralning nar kassetterna ar borttagna och sparren avaktiverad Undvik att uts tta dig f r str len te A aH UR da AAA BH PET HIA RTF e
28. post consumer waste content Temperature and humidity conditions Testing chambers simulate climates from all over the world Moisture content Business papers should have low moisture 4 5 Bending resistance and proper stiffness means optimum feeding through the printer Thickness impacts how much can be loaded into a tray Surface roughness measured in Sheffield units impacts print clarity and how well toner fuses to the paper Surface friction determines how easily sheets can be separated Paper and specialty media guidelines 87 Grain and formation impacts curling which also influences the mechanics of how the paper behaves as it moves through the printer Brightness and texture look and feel Recycled papers are better than ever however the amount of recycled content in a paper affects the degree of control over foreign matter And while recycled papers are one good path to printing in an environmentally responsible manner they are not perfect The energy required to de inkand deal with additives such as colorants and glue often generates more carbon emissions than does normal paper production However using recycled papers enables better resource management overall Lexmark concerns itself with the responsible use of paper in general based on life cycle assessments of its products To gain a better understanding of the impact of printers on the environment the company commissioned a number of life cycle a
29. the session proceeds normally If a bad certificate is provided the session is terminated immediately Allow means a server certificate is requested If no certificate is provided the session proceeds normally If a bad certificate is provided it will be ignored and the session proceeds normally Never means no server certificate is requested Minimum PIN Length 1 16 Limits the digit length of the PIN Note 4 is the is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 176 Confidential Print menu Menu item Description Max Invalid PIN Limits the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered Off Notes 2 10 e Off is the factory default setting This menu item appears only if a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed Once the limit is reached the print job for that user name and that PIN are deleted Job Expiration Limits the amount of time a confidential print job stays in the printer before it is Off deleted 1 hour Notes PRON Off is the f defaul i e 24 hours is the factory default setting 1 week If the Job Expiration setting is changed while confidential print jobs reside on the printer RAM or printer hard disk then the expiration time for those print jobs does not change to the new default value Ifthe printer is turned off all confidential jobs held in printer RAM are deleted M y Disk Wiping menu Disk Wiping erases only print j
30. transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides cT Press enter the shortcut number using the keypad and then touch ZS h To enter additional recipients touch Next address and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add Touch Send It Sending an e mail using the address book 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides From the home screen navigate to E mail gt Recipient s gt gt enter the name of recipient gt Browse shortcuts E mailing 117 4 Touch the name of the recipients To enter additional recipients touch Next address and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add or search the address book 5 Touch Done Customizing e mail settings Adding e mail subject and message information 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF
31. unknown printer Color Specifies whether or not a job prints in grayscale or color Color Note Color is the factory default setting Gray Resolution Specifies the resolution of the scan in dots per inch 150 Note 150 is the factory default setting 200 300 400 600 75 Darkness Lightens or darkens the output 1 9 Note 5 is the factory default setting Orientation Specifies the orientation of the scanned image Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Understanding printer menus Menu item Original Size Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Universal 4x 6in 3x5 in Business Card Custom Scan Size x A4 208 Description Specifies the paper size of the document being scanned Notes A4isthe international factory default setting Letter is the US factory default setting A5 Oficio Mexico A6 JIS B4 JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes Sides Duplex Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page off Notes Long edge Short edge Offis the factory default setting Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape JPEG Quality Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the image Best for Content 5 90 Notes Best for c
32. 103 placing separator sheets between copies 107 quick copy 102 reducing 106 selecting a tray 104 to a different size 104 using the ADF 102 using the scanner glass flatbed 103 copying different paper sizes 105 copying multiple pages on one sheet 108 copying on both sides of the paper duplexing 105 copying on letterhead 103 copying on transparencies 103 copying photos 103 corrupted printer hard disk 271 creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 127 creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 137 creating profiles using the ScanBack Utility 142 Custom Bin Names menu 158 custom name configuring 84 Custom Names menu 157 custom paper type name creating 83 Custom Scan Sizes menu 158 Custom Type x changing name 83 changing paper type 84 Custom Types menu 157 Index D date and time fax setting 126 daylight savings time faxing 127 Default Source menu 148 different paper sizes copying 105 directory list printing 100 Disk Wiping menu 176 display troubleshooting display is blank 286 display shows only diamonds 286 display printer control panel 23 adjusting brightness 71 distinctive ring service fax connecting to 125 documents printing from Macintosh 93 from Windows 93 duplexing 105 E Eco Mode setting 69 Edit Security Setups menu 174 Embedded Web Server accessing 254 administrator settings 254 checking printer status 254 checking supplies 245 creating a fax destinatio
33. 115 setting up e mail function 114 using a shortcut number 116 using the address book 116 340 using the touch screen 116 F factory defaults restoring 256 FAQ about color printing 315 fax and e mail functions setting up 294 fax and e mail functions are not set up 294 fax connection connecting the printer to the wall jack 123 connecting to a DSL line 124 connecting to a PBX or ISDN 124 fax connections regional adapters 125 fax log viewing 131 Fax Mode Analog Fax Setup menu 194 Fax Mode Fax Server Setup menu 203 Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator 272 fax screen advanced options 133 options 132 133 Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator 272 Fax Station Name not set up 272 Fax Station Number not set up 272 fax troubleshooting caller ID is not shown 294 can receive but not send faxes 297 can send but not receive faxes 296 cannot send or receive a fax 295 received fax has poor print quality 297 faxing blocking junk faxes 131 canceling a fax job 131 132 changing resolution 130 choosing a fax connection 123 configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time 127 creating shortcuts using the Embedded Web Server 127 creating shortcuts using the touch screen 128 Index distinctive ring service 125 fax setup 122 forwarding faxes 134 holding faxes 134 making a fax lighter or darker 130 sending a fax 128 sending a fax at a scheduled time 130 sending using th
34. Adobe Reader Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www adobe com Secure PDF Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access TIFF Creates multiple files or a single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG JPEG Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs e XPS Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages viewable using an Internet Explorer hosted viewer and the NET Framework or by downloading a third party standalone viewer Scanning to an FTP address 139 Color This option enables or disables color for the scanned image Resolution This option adjusts the output quality of your file Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size Darkness This option adjusts how light or dark your files will turn out in relation to the original document Page Setup This option lets you change the Sides Duplex Orientation and Binding Sides Duplex Specifies if the original document is simplex printed on one page or duplex printed on both sides This also identifies what needs to be scanned Orientation Specifies the orienta
35. Business Card Custom Scan Size x A4 AS Oficio Mexico A6 JIS B4 JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense 197 Description Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned Note Mixed Sizes is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Sides Duplex Specifies how text and graphics are oriented on a page Off Notes Long edge Short edge e Off is the factory default setting Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Content Type Specifies the type of content that will be scanned for faxing Text Notes Text Photo Graphics Text is the factory default setting Text is used when the content of the original Photo document is mostly text or line art Text Photo is used when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Graphics is used when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Photo is used when the document being scanned is mostly a photo or an image Understanding printer menus Menu item Content Source 198 Description Specifies how the output is produced Color Laser Notes Inkjet Magazine Color Laser is the factory default setting Color Laser is used whe
36. Continue IA From the Easy Install screen click Install u Type the user password and then click OK All the necessary applications are installed in the computer 6 Click Close when installation is complete b Add the printer e For IP printing In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later 1 From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences gt Print amp Fax 2 Click and then click the IP tab 3 Type the printer IP address in the address field and then click Add Additional printer setup 64 In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier 1 From the Finder navigate to Applications Utilities 2 Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center 3 From the Printer List click Add and then click IP Printer 4 Type in the printer IP address in the address field and then click Add For AppleTalk printing Note Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer In Mac OS X version 10 5 1 From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences Print amp Fax 2 Click and then navigate to AppleTalk select the printer from the list Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier 1 From the Finder navigate to Applications Utilities Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center From the Printer List click Add Click Default Browser tab More Printers From the first pop up menu select AppleTalk aw bu NN From the second pop up menu select Local AppleTalk Zone 7 Select the printer from the list and t
37. Enables the user to specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer A to 4 output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the r default Flash Drive menu Scan Settings Menu item M cr Description Format Specifies the format of the file to be sent through FTP PDF pdf Note PDF pdf is the factory default setting Secure PDF TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps PDF Version Sets the version of the PDF file to be sent through FTP 1 2 1 6 Note 1 5 is the factory default setting A 1a Content Type Specifies the type of content that will be scanned through FTP Text Photo Notes Photo Text Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Photo is used when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Graphics Text is used when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphics is used when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Photo is used when the document being scanned is mostly a photo or an image M Understanding printer menus 216 Menu item Description Content Source Specifies the source of content in the scan job Color Laser Notes Inkjet Photo Film Color Laser is the factory default setting Color Laser is used when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Magazine LL Newspa
38. FSK pattern 1 and DTMF pattern 2 The availability of these settings by way of the Fax menu depends on whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns Contact your telecommunications company to determine which pattern or switch setting to use Troubleshooting 295 Cannot send or receive a fax These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages CHECK THE POWER Make sure the printer is plugged in the power is on and Ready appears CHECK THE PRINTER CONNECTIONS Make sure the cable connections for the following hardware are secure if applicable Telephone Handset Answering machine CHECK THE TELEPHONE WALL JACK 1 Plug a telephone into the wall jack 2 Listen for a dial tone 3 If you do not hear a dial tone then plug a different telephone into the wall jack 4 If you still do not hear a dial tone then plug a telephone into a different wall jack 5 If you hear a dial tone then connect the printer to that wall jack REVIEW THIS DIGITAL PHONE SERVICE CHECKLIST The fax modem is an analog device Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone services can be used f you are using an ISDN telephone service then connect the printer to an analog telephone port an R interface port on an ISDN terminal adapter For more information and to request an R interface port contact your ISDN provide
39. INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO TITLE NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND ABSENCE OF VIRUSES ALL WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT LEXMARK CANNOT BY LAW DISCLAIM ANY COMPONENT OF THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE LEXMARK LIMITS THE DURATION OF SUCH WARRANTIES TO THE 90 DAY TERM OF THE EXPRESS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY This Agreement is to be read in conjunction with certain statutory provisions as that may be in force from time to time that imply warranties or conditions or impose obligations on Lexmark that cannot be excluded or modified If any such provisions apply then to the extent Lexmark is able Lexmark hereby limits its liability for breach of those provisions to one of the following providing you a replacement copy of the Software Program or reimbursement of the price paid for the Software Program The Software Program may include internet links to other software applications and or internet web pages hosted and operated by third parties unaffiliated with Lexmark You acknowledge and agree that Lexmark is not responsible in any way for the hosting performance operation maintenance or content of such software applications and or internet web pages 3 LIMITATION OF REMEDY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW ANY AND ALL LIABILITY OF LEXMARK UNDER THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE GREATER OF THE
40. Magazine Use when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper Use when the original document is from a newspaper Press Use when the original document was printed using a printing press Other Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer 7 Touch ZS gt Copy It Collating copies If you print multiple copies of a document then you can choose to print each copy as a set collated or to print the copies as groups of pages not collated Collated Not collated 1h y TR l 125 233 By default Collate is set to On If you do not want to collate your copies then change the setting to Off 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt enter the number of copies gt Collate gt Off gt ZS gt Copy It Placing separator sheets between copies 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin me
41. Ordering Horizontal Reverse Horizontal Reverse Vertical Vertical Specifies the positioning of multiple page images Notes Horizontal is the factory default setting Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation Paper Saver Orientation Auto Landscape Portrait Specifies the orientation of a multiple page document Note Auto is the factory default setting The printer chooses between portrait and landscape Paper Saver Border Prints a border on each page image None Note None is the factory default setting Solid Staple Job Specifies whether prints are stapled Off Note This menu appears only when a stapler is installed On Hole Punch Specifies whether prints have punched holes Off Note This menu appears only when a puncher is installed On Hole Punch Mode Determines the type of punch finishing performed on a print 2 holes Notes 3 holes 4 holes 3 holes is the US factory default setting 4 holes is the international factory default setting This menu appears only when a puncher is installed Understanding printer menus z Menu item Offset Pages None Between Copies Between Jobs r 226 Description Offsets pages at certain instances Notes None is the factory default setting Between Copies offsets each copy of a print job if Collate is set to On If Collate is set to Off each set of
42. PAGE PROTECT SETTING From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Print Recovery gt Page Protect gt Off gt ZS CHANGE THE ENVIRONMENTAL SETTINGS When using Eco Mode or Quiet Mode settings you may notice a reduction in performance Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type setting 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct type setting For Windows users specify the type from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the type from the Print dialog Incorrect characters print Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode If Ready Hex appears on the display you must exit Hex Trace mode before you can print your job Turn the printer off and back on to exit Hex Trace mode Make sure the SmartSwitch settings are set to On in the Network and USB menus Tray linking does not work These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following LOAD THE SAME SIZE AND TYPE OF PAPER Load the same size and type of paper in each tray to be linked Move the paper guides to the correct positions for the paper size loaded in each tray Troubleshooting 289 Ust THE SAME Paper SIZE AND PAPER TYPE SETTINGS Print a menu settings page and compare the settings for each tray f necessary
43. PC Port Range port range Specifies a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking firewall The valid ports are specified by two sets of numbers separated by a semicolon Note 9751 12000 is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus z Menu item Displayed Information Left side Right side Custom Text x x Toner Fuser Transfer Module 182 Description Specifies what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of the home screen For the Left side and Right side menus select from the following options None IP Address Hostname Contact Name Location Date Time mDNS DDNS Service Name Zero Configuration Name Custom Text x Model Name For the x Toner x Fuser and Transfer Module menus select from the following options When to display Do not display Display Message to Display Default Alternate Default text entry Alternate text entry Notes IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side Date Time is the factory default setting for Right side Do not display is the factory default setting for When to display Default is the factory default setting for Message to Display y Understanding printer menus 183 Menu item Description Displayed Information Lets you customize the displayed information for Waste Toner Waste Toner Bottle Bottle Paper Jam Load Paper and Service Errors Paper Jam Select from the following op
44. Paper menu and then touch Paper changed continue Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Change paper source to paper size paper type load orientation Try one or more of the following Touch Use current paper source to ignore the message and print from the selected tray Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu and then touch Paper changed continue Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Close paper transport cover Close the paper transport unit cover or door Troubleshooting 271 Close left side door Close the left side door of the printer Close tray door Close the specified tray door Close finisher side door Close the side door of the finisher Close finisher top cover Close the top cover of the finisher Close front door Close the front door of the printer Close top access cover Close the specified door or cover Disk corrupted The printer attempted a hard disk recovery on a corrupted hard disk and the hard disk cannot be repaired The hard disk must be reformatted Touch Format disk to reformat the printer hard disk and clear the message Note Formatting deletes all the files stored on the printer hard disk Disk near full Securely clearing disk space Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Delete
45. Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides From the home screen touch E mail Type an e mail address Touch Options gt Subject Type the e mail subject Touch Done gt Message Type an e mail message O on O Ui A UU N Touch Done E mail It Changing the output file type 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to E mail gt Recipient gt type an e mail address gt Send as 4 Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send e PDF Use this to create a single file with multiple pages viewable with Adobe Reader Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www adobe com Secure PDF Use this to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access TIFF Use this to create multiple files or a single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG E mailing 118 e JPEG Use this to create and attach a separate file for each p
46. Potential Damage Do not touch the USB cable any network adapter or the printer in the area shown while actively printing A loss of data or a malfunction can occur 2 Ethernet port Verifying printer setup Once all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on verify that the printer is set up correctly by printing the following Menu settings page Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly A list of installed options appears toward the bottom of the page If an option you installed is not listed then it is not installed correctly Remove the option and install it again Network setup page If your printer is a network model and is attached to a network print a network setup page to verify the network connection This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration Printing a menu settings page From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Menu Settings Page Additional printer setup 56 Printing a network setup page If the printer is attached to a network then print a network setup page to verify the network connection This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Network Setup Page 2 Check the first section of the network setup page and confirm that the status is Connected Ifthe statusisNot Connect
47. SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Solving scanner problems Checking an unresponsive scanner If your scanner is not responding then make sure The printer is turned on The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer print server option or other network device The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors uninterrupted power supplies or extension cords Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working Once you have checked each of these possibilities turn the printer off and then back on This often fixes the problem with the scanner Scan was not successful These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer AN ERROR MAY HAVE OCCURRED IN THE PROGRAM Turn off and then restart the computer Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer These are possible
48. Specifies the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder Notes Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting From the Paper menu Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for MP Feeder to appear as a menu item Note Only installed trays are listed in this menu NS Understanding printer menus 5 Menu item MP Feeder Type Custom Type x Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled Glossy Heavy Glossy Labels Vinyl Labels Bond Envelope Rough Envelope Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Paper 150 Description Specifies the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder Notes Custom Type x is the factory default setting From the Paper menu Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for MP Feeder to appear as a menu item Manual Paper Size Letter Legal Executive Oficio Mexico Folio Statement Universal A4 A5 A6 JIS B5 Specifies the size of the paper being manually loaded Note Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Note Only installed trays are listed in this menu is Understanding printer menus Menu item Manual Paper Type Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled Glossy Heavy Glossy Labels Vinyl Labels Bond Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Paper
49. Statistics Network Setup Page Network x Setup Page Shortcut List Fax Job Log Fax Call Log Copy Shortcuts E mail Shortcuts Fax Shortcuts FTP Shortcuts Profiles List Print Fonts Print Directory Asset Report Help Print All Guides Copy Guide E mail Guide Fax Guide FTP Guide Print Defects Guide Information Guide Supplies Guide Depending on the printer setup this menu appears as Standard Network or Network x This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed 145 Settings General Settings Copy Settings Fax Settings E mail Settings FTP Settings Flash Drive Menu Print Settings Manage Shortcuts Fax Shortcuts E mail Shortcuts FTP Shortcuts Copy Shortcuts Profile Shortcuts Understanding printer menus Supplies menu Menu item Replace Supply Separator Pick Assembly and Roller 146 Description Provides the option to reset the supply counter for the separator pick assembly and roller Select Yes to reset the supply counter Select No to exit Cyan Cartridge Early Warning Invalid Critically Low Missing Defective OK Unsupported Shows the status of the cyan toner cartridge Magenta Cartridge Early Warning Invalid Critically Low Missing Defective OK Unsupported Shows the status of the magenta toner cartridge Yellow Cartridge Early Warning Invalid Critically Low Missing Defective OK Unsupported Shows the status of the yellow t
50. Svizzera E necessario utilizzare il filtro Lexmark poich gli impulsi remoti sono presenti su tutte le linee analogiche in Svizzera Notice to Users in the European Union Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 1999 5 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hung ria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower III 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information Notices 329 Regulatory notices for wireless products This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters for example but not limited to wireless network cards or proximity card readers Exposure to radio frequency radiation The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio
51. Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the staple finisher Install envelope feeder Try one or more of the following nstall the envelope feeder 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Install the envelope feeder Troubleshooting 274 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Cancel the print job Load src with custom type name Try one or more of the following Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder Touch Paper loaded continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find atray with the correct paper type and size it prints from the default paper source Cancel the print job Load src with custom string Try one or more of the following Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder Touch Paper loaded continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find atray with the correct paper type and size it prints from the default paper source Cancel the print job Load src with size Try one or more of the following Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder Touch Paper loaded continue to clear the message and continue printing I
52. Touch Continue to print the portion of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job Cancel the current print job 37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing Delete fonts macros and other data in printer memory nstall additional printer memory 37 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs Touch Continue to clear the message 37 Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored The printer was unable to restore some or all of the confidential or held jobs on the printer hard disk Touch Continue to clear the message 38 Memory full Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message Cancel the current print job nstall additional printer memory 39 Complex page some data may not have printed Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Cancel the current print job nstall additional printer memory 40 color invalid refill change cartridge Replace the specified cartridge to continue printing Troubleshooting 280 51 Defective flash detected Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Cancel the current print job 52 Not enough free sp
53. a column under it which can show only three jobs per screen If more than three jobs exist in a column then an arrow appears enabling you to scroll through the jobs Change Language Launch the Change Language pop up window that allows you to change the primary language of the printer M ul Using the touch screen buttons Note Your home screen icons and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings and administrative setup Understanding the home screen Sample touch screen Copy from Sides Duplex Collate Letter 8 5 x 11 in 12 4 2 2 SLAE Copy to o Ed y f Letter 8 5 x 11 in Plain Paper 1to2 Sided On Staple Punch Content Scale i z Auto E E 100 0 i y Tex Photo Staples Left On Color Save as Shortcut Other Feature perknessis 1 o NEWER Se J On Setting 2 Log Out Copies 999 T PN Options om Touch To Submit Submit changes made in the printer settings Sample Copy Print a sample copy Right arrow Scroll to the right B Left arrow Scroll to the left Home Return to the home screen Right increase Select a higher value Left decrease Select a lower value Exit Exit from the current screen De Understanding the home screen 27 Open a context sensitive Help dialog on the touch screen Other touch screen buttons T
54. a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Note You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer 2 Add the printer For IP printing In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later a From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences Print amp Fax b Click and then click the IP tab Type the IP address of your printer in the Address field and then click Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier a From the Finder navigate to Applications Utilities b Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center c From the Printer List click Add and then click IP Printer d Type the IP address of your printer in the Address field and then click Add For AppleTalk printing Note Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer In Mac OS X version 10 5 a From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences Print amp Fax b Click and then navigate to AppleTalk select the printer from the list Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier a From the Finder navigate to Applications Utilities Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center From the Printer List click Add Click the Default Browser tab More Printers From the first pop up menu select AppleTalk From the second pop up menu select Local AppleTalk Zone Select the printer from the list and then click Add m 0 Q0 C Setting
55. access to the Fax Call log Log Output Bin Standard Bin Bin x Specifies the output bin where fax logs are printed Speaker Settings Menu item Speaker Mode On until Connected Always On Always Off Description Specifies the mode of the speaker Notes On until Connected is the factory default setting A sound is issued until the fax connection is made Always On turns the speaker on Always Off turns the speaker off Speaker Volume High Low Controls the volume setting Note High is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 203 Menu item Description Ringer Volume Controls the fax speaker ringer volume On Note On is the factory default setting Off Answer On Menu item Description All Rings Specifies ring patterns when device is answering calls Single Ring Only Note All Rings is the factory default setting Double Ring Only Triple Ring Only Single or Double Rings Only Single or Triple Rings Only Double or Triple Rings Only Fax Mode Fax Server Setup menu Fax Server mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission Fax Server Setup Menu item Description To Format Lets you enter the information using the virtual keyboard on the printer touch screen Reply Address Subject Message SMTP Setup Specifies SMTP setup information Primary SMTP Gateway Specifies SMTP server port information Secondary SMTP G
56. additional solutions and applications available for purchase To learn more visit www lexmark com Or inquire at your point of purchase Accessing the Embedded Web Server The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer 1 Obtain the printer IP address From the printer control panel home screen From the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu By printing a network setup page or menu settings page and then finding the TCP IP section Note An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field The Embedded Web Server page appears Showing or hiding icons on the home screen 1 From the Embedded Web Server click Settings General Settings Home screen customization A list of basic printer functions appears 2 Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the printer home screen Cleared check box items are hidden 3 Click Submit Activating the home screen applications For detailed information about configuring and using home screen applications visit the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Setting up and using the home screen applications 30 Forms and Favorites Icon M Description The application helps you simplify and streamline work processes by letti
57. all prior or contemporaneous oral or written communications proposals and representations with respect to the Software Program or any other subject matter covered by this License Agreement except to the extent such extraneous terms do not conflict with the terms of this License Agreement any other written agreement signed by you and Lexmark relating to your Use of the Software Program To the extent any Lexmark policies or programs for support services conflict with the terms of this License Agreement the terms of this License Agreement shall control MICROSOFT CORPORATION NOTICES 1 This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by Microsoft Corporation The terms and conditions upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property may be found at http go microsoft com fwlink Linkld 52369 Notices 337 2 This product is based on Microsoft Print Schema technology You may find the terms and conditions upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property at http go microsoft com fwlink Linkld 83288 ADOBE SYSTEMS INCORPORATED NOTICE Contains Flash Flash Lite and or Reader technology by Adobe Systems Incorporated This Product contains Adobe Flash player software under license from Adobe Systems Incorporated Copyright 1995 2007 Adobe Macromedia Software LLC All rights reserved Adobe Reader and Flash are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Index Index Numerics 1565 Emulatio
58. and feeders Off Notes None 0 199 e Off is the factory default setting Assign Tray x None ignores the Select Paper Feed command This selection is displayed Off only when it is selected by the PCL 5e interpreter Nina 0 199 allows a custom setting to be assigned 0 199 Assign Manual Paper Off None 0 199 Assign Manual Env Off None 0 199 Tray Renumber Displays the factory default setting assigned to each tray drawer or feeder View Factory Defaults MPF Default 8 T1 Default 1 T2 Default 4 T3 Default 5 T4 Default 20 T5 Default 21 Env Default 6 MPaper Default 2 MEnv Default 3 Understanding printer menus Menu item 234 Tray Renumber Restore Defaults Description Returns all tray drawer and feeder assignments to the factory default settings Yes No S HTML menu Menu Item Description Font Name Joanna MT Sets the default font for HTML documents Albertus MT Letter Gothic Note The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not Antique Olive Lubalin Graph specify a font Apple Chancery Marigold Arial MT Monalisa Recut Avant Garde Monaco Bodoni New CenturySbk Bookman New York Chicago Optima Clarendon Oxford Cooper Black Palatino Copperplate StempelGaramond Coronet Taffy Courier Times Eurostile TimesNewRoman Garamond Univers Geneva Zapf Chancery Gill Sans NewSansMTCS Goudy NewSansMTCT Helvetica New SansMTJA Hoefler Text NewSansMTKO Intl CG Times Intl Courier Int
59. and that there is less packaging to dispose of These efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions energy savings and natural resource savings Lexmark cartons are 100 recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist Facilities may not exist in your area The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist Facilities may not exist in your area When you return a cartridge to Lexmark you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in Lexmark will recycle the box Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling The Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling One hundred percent of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling Boxes used to return the cartridges are also recycled To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and use the prepaid shipping label You can also do the following 1 Visit our Web site at www lexmark com recycle 2 From the Toner Cartridges section select your country or region from the list 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Loading paper and specialty media 74 Loading paper and specialty media This section explains how to load the 550 sheet trays the 2 0
60. can be created to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Manage Shortcuts gt Fax Shortcut Setup Note A password may be required If you do not have an ID and password get one from your system support person 3 Type a unique name for the shortcut and then enter the fax number To create a multiple number shortcut enter the fax numbers for the group Note Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon 4 Assign a shortcut number If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number 5 Click Add Faxing 128 Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides From the home screen navigate to Fax gt enter the fax number To create a group of fax
61. defective or worn cartridges THERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH Contact Customer Support Transparency print quality is poor Try one or more of the following CHECK THE TRANSPARENCIES Use only transparencies that meet the printer specifications CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting is set to Transparency 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type setting 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct type setting For Windows users specify the type from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the type from the Print dialog Uneven print density BS ABCD ABCD ABCD 314 Troubleshooting 315 IVIAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE OR WORN PRINT CARTRIDGE Replace the worn or defective print cartridge Solving color quality problems FAQ about color printing What is RGB color Red green and blue light can be added together in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in nature For example red and green can be combined to create yellow Televisions and computer monitors create colors in this manner RGB color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of red green or blue needed to produce a certain color What is CMYK color Cyan magenta yellow and black inks or toners can be printed in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in nature For example cyan and yellow can be combined to create
62. direktive 1999 5 ES Svenska H rmed intygar Lexmark International Inc att denna produkt star i verensst mmelse med de v sentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta best mmelser som framg r av direktiv 1999 5 EG Notices 332 Statement of Limited Warranty Lexmark X792de X792dte X792dtfe X792dtpe X792dtme X792dtse Lexmark International Inc Lexington KY This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada For customers outside the U S refer to the country specific warranty information that came with your product This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use and not for resale from Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer referred to in this statement as Remarketer Limited warranty Lexmark warrants that this product s manufactured from new parts or new and serviceable used parts which perform like new parts ls during normal use free from defects in material and workmanship If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair or replacement at Lexmark s option If this product is a feature or option this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product for which it was intended To obtain warranty service you may be required to present the feature or option with the product If you transfer this product to another user warranty service
63. document was printed using a printing press Other Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Color This option enables or disables color for the scanned image Advanced Options Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings ADF Skew Fix Use to correct slight skew in the scanned image Advanced Duplex Use to specify the document orientation whether documents are one sided or two sided and how documents are bound Note Some Advanced Duplex options are available only on select printers Advanced Imaging Use to change or adjust Auto Center Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast Mirror Image Negative Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail Sharpness and Temperature settings before you copy the document Create Booklet Use to create a booklet You can choose between 1 sided and 2 sided booklets Note This option appears only when a print duplexer and printer hard disk are installed Cover Page Setup Use to set copy cover page and booklet cover page Custom Job Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job Edge Erase Use to eliminate smudges or information aroundthe edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan
64. door and then remove the jammed paper 2 24x Open side door of the specified tray and then remove the jammed paper 3 250 Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder and then remove the jammed paper 4 280 289 Remove all paper from the ADF and then remove the jammed paper 290 292 Close the ADF cover 5 400 403 Open the paper transport unit door and then remove the jammed paper 460 461 6 431 438 Pushthe button to slide the finisher to the right open the finisher door and then remove the jammed paper 7 455 Open staple door remove the staple cartridge and then remove the jammed staple Clearing jams 259 200 paper jam 1 Open the side door of the printer A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Close the side door of the printer 4 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared 201 paper jam 1 Open the side door of the printer A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 Determine where the jam is located and then remove it a lf paper is inside the fuser unit then open the fuser access door b Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each s
65. drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are printed on Copying Save As Shortcut This option allows the current settings to be saved as a shortcut by assigning a number 113 E mailing 114 E mailing a ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings M y You can use the printer to e mail scanned documents to one or more recipients There are three ways to send an e mail from the printer You can type the e mail address use a shortcut number or use the address book Getting ready to e mail Setting up the e mail function 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Click Settings Under Default Settings click E mail FTP Settings Click E mail Settings gt Setup E mail Server Fill in the fields with the appropriate information a uu A Y N Click Submit Configuring e mail settings 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do n
66. fonts macros and other data stored on the printer hard disk nstall a hard disk with higher capacity Disk problem The printer hard disk must be reformatted Touch Format disk to reformat the printer hard disk and clear the message Note Formatting deletes all the files stored on the printer hard disk Troubleshooting 272 Empty the hole punch box 1 Empty the hole punch box For instructions on emptying the hole punch box from the printer control panel touch More Information 2 Reinsert the hole punch box into the finisher and then touch Continue to clear the message Error reading USB drive Remove USB An unsupported USB device has been inserted Remove the USB device and then install a supported one Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator The fax partition appears to be corrupted Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer If the message appears again then contact your system support person Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator The printer is in Fax Server mode but the Fax Server setup has not been completed Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message Complete the Fax Server setup If the message appears again contact your system support person Fax Station Name not set up The Fax Station Name has not been entered Sending and receiving
67. frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory agencies A minimum separation of 20 cm 8 inches must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies Industry Canada Canada This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada To prevent radio interference to the licensed service this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding Equipment or its transmit antenna that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population consult Safety Code 6 obtainable from Health Canada s Web site www hc sc gc ca rpb The term IC before the certification registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met Industry Canada Canada Cet appareil est conforme la norme RSS 210 d Industry Can
68. green Printing presses inkjet printers and color laser printers create colors in this manner CMYK color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of cyan magenta yellow and black needed to reproduce a particular color How is color specified in a document to be printed Software programs typically specify document color using RGB or CMYK color combinations Additionally they allow users to modify the color of each object in a document For more information see the software program Help topics How does the printer know what color to print When a user prints a document information describing the type and color of each object is sent to the printer The color information is passed through color conversion tables that translate the color into the appropriate amounts of cyan magenta yellow and black toner needed to produce the desired color The object information determines the application of color conversion tables For example it is possible to apply one type of color conversion table to text while applying a different color conversion table to photographic images Why doesn t the printed color match the color see on the computer screen The color conversion tables used in Auto Color Correction mode generally approximate the colors of a standard computer monitor However because of technology differences that exist between printers and monitors there are many colors that can also be affected by monitor variations a
69. in the e mail Orientation Specifies the orientation of the original document and then changes Sides and Binding to match the orientation Binding Specifies if the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge side Scan Preview This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e mail When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Advanced Options Touching this button opens a screen where you can change ADF Skew Fix Advanced Imaging Custom Job Edge Erase and Transmission Log settings ADF Skew Fix This lets you correct slight skew in the scanned image Advanced Imaging This lets you adjust the Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast JPEG Quality Mirror Image Negative Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail Sharpness and Temperature settings before you e mail the document Custom Job This lets you combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job Edge Erase This lets you eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan Transmission Log This lets you print the transmission log or transmission error log Faxing 121 Faxing Note Fax capabilities may not be available on all printer models
70. in this bin Envelopes are routed here Finisher bin The paper capacity is 500 sheets Envelopes A5 A6 and statement paper sizes are not supported in this bin Paper and specialty media guidelines 92 Finishing features Teen Tee ortourhole sth nator tea punch Finisher M y y y y A5 X X y X Executive y y y y Folio y X y y JIS B5 y y y y Legal Y y y y Letter y y y y Statement X X y y Universal X X y y Envelopes any size X X Jy X ene y y y y Printing 93 Printing This chapter covers printing printer reports and job cancelation The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print For more information see Avoiding jams on page 257 and Storing paper on page 88 Printing a document Printing a document 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu set the Paper Type and Paper Size to match the loaded paper 2 Send the print job For Windows users a With a document open click File gt Print b Click Properties Preferences Options or Setup c Adjust settings as necessary d Click OK gt Print For Macintosh users a Customize the settings as needed in the Page Setup dialog 1 With a document open choose File Page Setup 2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the loaded paper 3 Click OK b Customize the settings as needed in the Print dialog 1 With a doc
71. item Description Activate Activates TCP IP On Note On is the factory default setting Off Set Hostname Lets you set the current TCP IP hostname Note This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server IP Address Lets you view or change the current TCP IP address Note Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP settings to Off It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that support BOOTP and RARP Netmask Lets you view or change the current TCP IP netmask Gateway Lets you view or change the current TCP IP gateway Enable DHCP Specifies the DHCP address and parameter assignment setting On Note On is the factory default setting Off Enable RARP Specifies the RARP address assignment setting On Note On is the factory default setting Off Enable BOOTP Specifies the BOOTP address assignment setting On Note On is the factory default setting Off s Understanding printer menus 165 z Menu item Description 00000 Enable AutolP Specifies the Zero Configuration Networking setting Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No Enable FTP TFTP Enables the built in FTP server which allows you to send files to the printer using File Yes Transfer Protocol No Note Yes is the factory default setting Enable HTTP Server Enables the built in web server Embedded Web Server When enabled the printer Yes can be monitored and managed rem
72. loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides Scanning to a computer or flash drive 142 Sra C Press and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad or touch Held Jobs on the home screen and then touch Profiles d After entering the shortcut number the scanner scans and sends the document to the directory or program you specified If you touched Profiles on the home screen then locate your shortcut on the list 8 Return to the computer to view the file The output file is saved in the location or launched in the program you specified Scanning to a flash drive 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer The USB Drive home screen appears 4 Select the destination folder and then touch Scan to USB drive 5 Adjust the scan settings 6 Touch Scan It Understanding the Scan Center features The Scan Center software lets you modify scan settings and select where to send the scanned output Scan settings modified with the Scan Center software can be saved and used for other scan jobs The following features are available Scan and sen
73. minimum conditions for connection toits network It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom nor does it provide any sort of warranty Above all it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted equipment of a different make or model nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom s network services This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom s 111 Emergency Service This equipment may not provide for the effective hand over of a call to another device connected to the same line This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom s telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment associated with this device The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance to Telecom s specifications There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation and The equipment shall go on hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next call attempt The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of anoth
74. of the following IVIAKE SURE PRINT CARTRIDGES ARE INSTALLED CORRECTLY AND ARE NOT DEFECTIVE Reinstall or replace the print cartridge 312 Troubleshooting 313 IVIAKE SURE THE TRANSFER BELT IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the transfer belt For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part IVIAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the fuser For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part IVIAKE SURE THERE IS NO TONER IN THE PAPER PATH Clean any visible toner from the paper path If the problem persists then contact customer support RECALIBRATE THE PRINTER Perform color adjust from the printer control panel Quality menu CHECK THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM OR APPLICATION The software program or application may have specified an off white background Toner rubs off These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray CHECK THE PAPER WEIGHT AND PAPER TEXTURE SETTINGS Change the Paper Weight from Normal to Heavy If necessary change the Paper Texture from Normal to Rough in the printer control panel Paper menu THE FUSER IS WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the fuser Troubleshooting Toner specks These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following THE TONER CARTRIDGES ARE WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the
75. oooooocccnccnncconnnonononnononnnnnnnnnnno nono nnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnrnonnrnennnnncncnnnenos 88 S pported paper sizes iia A de tenti ids 88 Supported paper types and WEIgNS ccccsssssccesssssseececssssesecesceesueeeesssseecceseesseeeeeesessaseeesceseaae sensi rsen nnns nane 90 Supported finishing featUtes oni tecti e iaa lenta epa encre avete cede 90 Printing a GOGUM yin dt tad 93 Printing a docurmenticus cei nx RR eite n Hnnc dte i 93 Printing in black and white edere dd andadas 93 Adjusting toner darkress rec etit daa oi 93 Printing from a flash driVez ui iere tette lees een eee teer ar pae NL eden e exa para ledeeoddoveosedgnndcanadetedoaenendeds vane 94 Printing from a flash drive ettet isa aud 94 Supported flash drives and file tyP s ccccssssscccccsssseceecessesecesceeseaeeceseesseeeceeseseaseeescesssseeeeesesesesueaeeesseeenaes 96 Printing on specialty media M e RRA eRU eaa u Eae a age su uds 96 Tips on Using letterhead oniinn 32 cenis eet iii 96 TIPS OM USING transparerncies cerca iaa 97 Tips on using envelopes iet ete etta e dte Ee dote ear eR ta asa e tego E epe e tii 97 METRI EIE REID RNMI arida 97 TipsvOn using card OR emet pieno iei dene ea 98 Printing confidential and other held jobs esses nennen nennen nennen nnne nennen nnn 98 Storing print jobs in the printer ccccccccccsssssccccessessseeccessse
76. re committed to delivering performance and value with our printers and we want to make sure you re satisfied If you do encounter any problems along the way one of our knowledgeable support representatives will be delighted to help you get back on track fast And if you find something we could do better please let us know After all you are the reason we do what we do and your suggestions help us do it better Finding information about the printer What are you looking for Find it here Initial setup instructions Setup documentation The setup documentation came with the printer and is also available on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Connecting the printer Installing the printer software Additional setup and instructions for using the printer User s Guide The User s Guide is available on the Selecting and storing paper and specialty media Software and Documentation CD For updates check our Web site at Loading paper E pap http support lexmark com Configuring printer settings Viewing and printing documents and photos Setting up and using the printer software Configuring the printer on a network depending on your printer model Caring for and maintaining the printer Troubleshooting and solving problems Instructions for Networking Guide Open the Software and Documentation CD and then look for Printer and Software Documentation under the Pubs folder From th
77. report containing information about e mail shortcuts Fax Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about fax shortcuts FTP Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about FTP shortcuts Profiles List Prints a list of profiles stored in the printer Print Fonts Prints a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in the printer Print Directory Prints a list of all the resources stored on an optional flash memory card or printer hard disk Notes Job Buffer Size must be set to 10096 Make sure the optional flash memory or printer hard disk is installed correctly and working Asset Report Prints a report containing asset information including the printer serial number and model name The report contains text and UPC barcodes that can be scanned into an asset database y Network Ports menu Active NIC menu Description Active NIC Notes Auto Auto is the factory default setting list of available network cards This menu item appears only if an optional network card is installed Standard Network or Network x menus Note Only active ports appear in this menu all inactive ports are omitted Understanding printer menus 162 Menu item Description PCL SmartSwitch Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires On it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes e Onis
78. scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive The computer does not have to be directly connected to the printer for you to receive Scan to PC images You can scan the document back to the computer over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the printer Scanning to a computer 1 u A U N o Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Click Scan Profile Create Select your scan settings and then click Next Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scanned output file Enter a scan name The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display Click Submit Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen A shortcut number was automatically assigned when you clicked Submit You can use this shortcut number when you are ready to scan your documents a Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass b If you are
79. scanning When using the ADF touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears e When using the scanner glass touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears or while Scan the Next Page Finish the Job appears Faxing 132 Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory 1 On the home screen touch Cancel Jobs The Cancel Jobs screen appears Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel Only three jobs appear on the screen touch the down arrow until the job you want appears and then touch the job you want to cancel Touch Delete Selected Jobs The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears the selected jobs are deleted and then the home screen appears Understanding fax options Content This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document Choose content type from Text Text Photo Photo or Graphics Text Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphics Use when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Text Photo Use when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Photo Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image Choose content source from Color Laser Black White Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press or Other Color Laser Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Las
80. setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Install the printer and any options you have purchased in the following order Caster base Optional spacer Optional 550 sheet trays or 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder Standard 550 sheet trays Printer For information on installing a caster base a 550 or 2 000 sheet optional tray spacer or any of the finishers see the setup documentation that came with the option Additional printer setup 53 Installing optional trays The printer supports the following optional input sources e 550 sheet tray 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer ba
81. settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port cesses 65 Setting up serial pFintihg s cerent eco tr net Feet aee Exe e oes Pe ca REL Soe en Erb EAS ORE RARE SERE ERA caia 66 Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 68 SAVING paper ANC toner eie A euh sues SERVER PERSE sass ov SERES ENTE Fu SERVER Ee RR aa eo 68 Using recycled paper iii adenda larak it 68 Coriserving supplies ere i RR PR REESE S Ra RED ERE Mee SERRA Re RAE REPRE RR iiaia 68 SAVIA dci ER 69 Sin gsEGO MOd Et 69 A eer 69 Adjusting SleepMOGe i cer et ee ha een ii ORR A ee E ER 70 Using HibernateMode xtatis tutae 71 Adjusting the brightness of the display esses nennen E nennn innen nennen ESEA VERE 71 Setting the standard exitbiri light ao eee decet 72 s Tovro I er 72 Recycling Lexmark produets i scien ee eae ee eran dete ere er he otek ere 72 Recycling Lexmark packaging Rete ete iae de A di 73 Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling esses nennen eene enne nennen enne 73 Loading paper and specialty media ecce eee eee 20 Setting the paper size and Perrita read unen ado as e iade Puig ene ERE Re DS raid dd v 74 Configuring Universal paper settings sisse eene eene enn nenne nnnm nnn n sanas nass annee 74 Loading the standard or optional 550 sheet traY ococccccnnnnonnnonnononon
82. sisi nnne nn nnns sse n nnns nennen 42 Installing a printer hard disk ie territi sheds reco da evi 46 Removing a printer hard disk esses nennen nnne enne nennen nasse nnn nenas seen nn sensns seen rinse nena 51 Onder of installation re creed eee seo oue saya Dex e eo tgo ede cesedevt acess sduangdecdeeseassvelededuecteasensdiendvedss 52 installing optional trays ottenere eere E Lee ea erede edd set Oen La NAR PPREE TRA SUR EE 53 Attaching cables OO 54 Verifying printer setup eina eaae uni ene tne rea a iaa tet dl connue RE a pea da dia E Ido 55 Printing a menu settings Dag tert rer ioe A id cados 55 Printing a network setup pag uni 56 Setting up the printer softwares ereas ena aa e a aE Ea E aE EE E RE Edu dun 56 Contents 3 installing the printer SoftWare iii cut pe e cede ec ded cera Ro Dee lis 56 Updating available options in the printer driver eese eene nennen nnne nnne enne nenne 57 Setting Up wireless printing iiec eoe ere A dvd eee ed vex edid rea adve dead eras es rdv ead deg 57 Information you will need to set up the printer on a wireless Network coconococccnnnnocnnnnnnncnonnnnnnnnnnnacnnncnnnnno 57 Installing the printer on a wireless network Windows 58 Installing the printer on a wireless network Macintosh esses eene nnne nnne nnne nnn 60 Installing the printer on a wired network sse nnne enne nennen nenne 62 Changing port
83. site at http support lexmark com MAKE SURE PRINTER CABLES ARE SECURELY CONNECTED Check the cable connections to the printer and print server to make sure they are secure For more information see the setup documentation that came with the printer Confidential and other held jobs do not print These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following PARTIAL JOB NO JOB OR BLANK PAGE PRINTS The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data Delete the print job and then print it again For PDF documents recreate the PDF and then print it again If you are printing from the Internet then the printer may be reading multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting all jobs except the first one For Windows users open Print Properties From the Print and Hold dialog select the Keep duplicate documents check box under the User name text box before entering a PIN number For Macintosh users save each print job naming each job differently and then send the individual jobs to the printer IVIAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS SUFFICIENT MEMORY Free up additional printer memory by scrolling through the list of held jobs and deleting some of them Troubleshooting 288 Print job takes longer than expected Try one or more of the following REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB Eliminate the number and size of fonts the number and complexity of images and the number of pages in the print job TURN OFF THE
84. size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Size setting 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Fine horizontal lines appear on color pages You may notice fine horizontal lines in photographs or pages with a high concentration of color This can occur when the printer is in Quiet Mode To fix this set Quiet Mode to Off Image Photo Troubleshooting 304 Shadow images appear on prints Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings 2 Before sending the print job specify the correct paper type setting For Windows users specify the paper type from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the paper type from the Print dialog IVIAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER When 88 xx color cartridge low appears make sure that toner is distributed evenly among all four print cartridges or whichever color has the shadow images 1 Remove the print cartridge Warning Potential Damage Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of futur
85. solutions Try one or more of the following OTHER SOFTWARE PROGRAMS MAY BE INTERFERING WITH SCANNING Close all programs not being used Troubleshooting 293 THE SCAN RESOLUTION MAY BE SET TOO HIGH Select a lower scan resolution Poor scanned image quality These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY Clean the scanner glass with a clean lint free cloth dampened with water For more information see Cleaning the scanner glass on page 241 ADJUST THE SCAN RESOLUTION Increase the resolution of the scan for a higher quality output CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Partial document or photo scans These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties
86. stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected Understanding printer menus 188 Copy Settings menu Menu item Description Content Type Specifies the type of content contained in the copy job Text Photo Notes Text Graphics Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Photo is used when the original Photo document is a mixture of text graphics and photos e Text is used when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphics is used when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Photo is used when the document being scanned is mostly a photo or an image Content Source Specifies the source of content in the copy job Color Laser Notes Inkjet Magazine Color Laser is the factory default setting Color Laser is used when the original Pica document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Laser e Black White Laser is used when the original document was printed using a black white laser printer Photo Film A e a Newspaper Inkjet is used when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer Other Photo Film is used when the original document is a photo from film Magazine is used when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper is used when the original document is from a newspaper Press is used when the original document was printed using a printing press Oth
87. t RENE ERE Rer RE iet Metu toe meten 271 Close fo Te oio 1 01 n CE 271 Disk corrupted hen hte teinte i Nain ie E nien 271 Disk near full Securely clearing disk space sssessssssseeseeee eene nennen enne nennen nnne 271 Disk probletm Ee eem Ie Mene ano 271 Empty the hole punch DOX x bdo dl din uen 272 Error reading USB drive Remove USB csccccccsssseceeeessesssesesesseececeseesueeeeceseaseeecesesssaeeeeeseeaaeeeeseesesenseeeeens 272 Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator eene 272 Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator eese nennen 272 Fax St tiori Name noEbSet UP sic acre ce ete th Saar eor actas 272 Fax Station Number not set Up nitore AA mu die 272 Installbim E ON 273 Install Tray e ic tetto oett a va ote etate agsueneeuaNssteacdetastvessans cetvsedeeat iae eaei 273 Insert the hole p nch bOox ie iE ct mem RON be reds Dari ee 273 Insert Tray x cse eie rect tti cien tetti stituit eei bonis estf ent 273 Insert staple cartridge oe echas a aiii 273 Install envelope feedet RE HW A A A t 273 Load src with custom type NAME cccesccecessseceeeesessseeceesesssusecescseueeeeesscsseecesesesseeeeesessaaeeeseeeesesesaeeeeens 274 Load src with custom string cional cocleares 274 Load src With sIze ettet A e eoe ane Dor ev ec Peto De dex nad 274 Load src with type size iren Eee rein aste fece Sept eta cial 274
88. tab 3 Type the IP address of the printer in the address field and then click Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier 1 From the Finder navigate to Applications Utilities 2 Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center 3 From the Printer List choose Add and then click IP Printer 4 Type the IP address of the printer in the address field and then click Add For AppleTalk printing Note Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer In Mac OS X version 10 5 1 From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences Print amp Fax 2 Click and then navigate to AppleTalk select the printer from the list Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier 1 From the Finder navigate to Applications Utilities Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center From the Printer List click Add Click Default Browser tab More Printers From the first pop up menu select AppleTalk From the second pop up menu select Local AppleTalk Zone Select the printer from the list and then click Add Nou bu N Installing the printer on a wired network These instructions apply to Ethernet and fiber optic network connections Note Make sure you have completed the initial setup of the printer 62 Additional printer setup 63 For Windows users 1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD If the installation screen does not appear after a minute then launch the CD manually a Click e or click Start and then cl
89. the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the system board 1 Access the system board For more information see Accessing the system board on page 35 Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver 2 Unpack the memory card Note Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card Additional printer setup 39 3 On the system board open the memory card connector latches 4 Align the notches on the memory card to the ridges on the connector 1 Notch 2 Ridge Additional printer setup 40 5 Push the memory card straight into the connector until it clicks into place 6 Reattach the system board cover Installing a flash memory or firmware card The system board has two connections for an optional flash memory or firmware card Only one of each may be installed but the connectors are interchangeable CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the po
90. the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Security Set Date and Time Faxing 127 3 Inthe Set Date amp Time field enter the current date and time 4 Click Submit Note It is recommended to use the network time Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Security Set Date and Time 3 Select the Automatically Observe DST checkbox and then enter the DST start and end dates in the Custom Time Zone Setup section 4 Click Submit Creating shortcuts Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server Instead of entering the entire phone number of a fax recipient on the printer control panel each time you want to send a fax you can create a permanent fax destination and assign a shortcut number A shortcut
91. the factory default setting When Off is used the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off PS SmartSwitch Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires On it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes On is the factory default setting When Off is used the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off NPA Mode Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional Auto communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Off Notes Auto is the factory default setting Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Network Buffer Auto 3KB to maximum size allowed Sets the size of the network input buffer Notes Auto is the factory default setting The value can be changed in 1 KB increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer d
92. the original document E mailing 119 Resolution Adjusts the output quality of your e mail Increasing the image resolution increases the e mail file size and the time needed to scan your original document Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the e mail file size Color This option sets the output color for the scanned image Touch to enable or disable color Content This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document Choose content type from Text Text Photo Photo or Graphics Text Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphics Use when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Text Photo Use when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Photo Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image Choose content source from Color Laser Black White Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press or Other Color Laser Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Laser Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer Inkjet Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer Photo Film Use when the original document is a photo from film Magazine Use when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper Use when the original document is fro
93. the paper type 74 Index setting the Universal paper size 74 setting up e mail alerts using the Embedded Web Server 255 setting up fax and e mail functions 294 setting up serial printing 66 setting up the printer on a wired network Macintosh 62 on a wired network Windows 62 Setup menu 221 shadow images appear on prints 304 shipping the printer 253 shortcuts creating e mail 115 fax destination 127 128 FTP address 138 FTP destination 137 showing icons on the home screen 29 Sleep Mode adjusting 70 Slide finisher to the left 277 SMTP Setup menu 173 solid color or black pages appear on prints 310 Some held jobs were not restored 277 standard exit bin lighting setting 72 Standard Network menu 161 standard tray loading 75 Standard USB menu 167 staple cartridges ordering 247 staple jam clearing 455 staple jam 266 status of supplies checking 245 storing paper 88 supplies 245 storing print jobs 98 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 311 streaks appear on a page 311 subject and message information adding to e mail 117 Substitute Size menu 152 supplies checking status 245 checking from printer control panel 245 checking using the Embedded Web Server 245 conserving 68 storing 245 using recycled paper 68 Supplies menu 146 supplies ordering ADF kit 247 cleaning kit 247 print cartridges 246 staple cartridges 247 waste toner bottle 247 Supply needed to complete job 277 supp
94. the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received On through a USB port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes On is the factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to Off PS SmartSwitch Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received On through a USB port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes Onisthe factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off NPA Mode Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional Auto communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol On Notes Off Auto is the factory default setting Auto sets the printer to examine data determine the format and then process it appropriately Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Ne Understanding printer menus Menu item USB Buffer Auto 3KB to max
95. thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy 4 Touch Copy from select the size of the original document ZS j 5 Touch Copy to select the size of the copy v d Note The printer will scale the size automatically 6 Touch Copy It Making copies using paper from a selected tray 1 Loadan original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt size of the original document gt Copy to Copying 105 4 Touch Manual Feeder or select the tray that contains the paper type you want to use Note If you choose Manual Feeder then you will also need to select the paper size and type 5 Touch Copy It Copying different paper sizes Use the ADF to copy original documents with different paper sizes Depending on the paper sizes loaded and the Copy to and Copy from settings each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes Example 1 or scaled to fit a single paper size Example 2 Example 1 Copying on mixed paper sizes
96. to FTP job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page Notes Onis the factory default setting This menu setting applies to all scan functions Scan Bit Depth Enables the Text Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images when 8 bit Color is set to Off 1 bit Note 8 bit is the factory default setting File Name Lets you enter a base file name Note A maximum of 53 characters is allowed Custom Job Scanning Off On Lets you copy a document containing mixed paper sizes in a single copy job Note Off is the factory default setting Scan Preview Off On Specifies whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Background Removal 4 to 4 Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Enables an equal balance of colors in the scanned image Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Specifies which color to drop during scanning and how much to increase or decrease the dropout Notes None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Contrast Best for content 0
97. type of equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Espa ol Por medio de la presente Lexmark International Inc declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999 5 CE Eesti K esolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International Inc et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999 5 EU p hin uetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele s tetele Suomi Lexmark International Inc vakuuttaa t ten ett t m tuote on direktiivin 1999 5 EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja muiden sit koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen Fran ais Par la pr sente Lexmark International Inc d clare que l appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999 5 CE Magyar Alul rott Lexmark International Inc nyilatkozom hogy a term k megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet k vetelm nyeknek s az 1999 5 EC ir nyelv egy b el r sainak slenska H r med l sir Lexmark International Inc yfir pv ad essi vara er samr mi vi grunnkr fur og a rar kr fur sem ger ar eru tilskipun 1999 5 EC Italiano Con la presente Lexmark International Inc dichiara che questo questo prodotto conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999 5 CE Latviski Ar o Lexmark Internat
98. your PIN gt your print job name gt number of copies gt Print For other print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt your user name gt your print job name gt number of copies gt Print Printing information pages Printing a font sample list 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Print Fonts 2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts Printing a directory list A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or on the printer hard disk From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Print Directory Canceling a print job Canceling a print job from the printer control panel 1 Touch Cancel Jobs on the touch screen or press X on the keypad 2 Touch the job you want to cancel and then touch Delete Selected Jobs Canceling a print job from the computer For Windows users 1 Open the printers folder a Click e or click Start and then click Run b Inthe Start Search or Run box type control printers C Press Enter or click OK 2 Double click the printer icon 3 Select the print job you want to cancel 4 From the keyboard press Delete Printing 101 For Macintosh users In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later 1 From the Apple menu choose System Preferences gt Print amp Fax gt Open Print Queue 2 From the printer window select the print job you want to cancel 3 From the icon bar at the top of the window click the Delete icon In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier 1 From t
99. 0 Maintaining the printer Periodically certain tasks are required to maintain optimum print quality Cleaning the exterior of the printer 1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding 2 Remove paper from the standard exit bin 3 Dampen aclean lint free cloth with water Warning Potential Damage Do not use household cleaners or detergents as they may damage the finish of the printer 4 Wipe only the outside of the printer making sure to include the standard exit bin Warning Potential Damage Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer 5 Make sure the paper support and standard exit bin are dry before beginning a new print job Maintaining the printer 241 Cleaning the scanner glass Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems such as streaks on copied or scanned images 1 Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth or paper towel with water 2 Open the scanner cover White underside of the ADF cover White underside of the scanner cover 1 2 3 Scanner glass 4 ADF glass s A 3 Wipe the areas shown and let them dry Maintaining the printer 242 4 Open the bottom ADF door 5 Wipe the ADF sca
100. 00 4 Click Submit Solving home screen applications problems An application error has occurred CHECK THE SYSTEM LOG FOR RELEVANT DETAILS 1 Type the printer IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address or host name of the printer then you can View the information on the printer control panel home screen or in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings or Configuration 3 Click Device Solutions Solutions eSF System tab Log 4 From the Filter menu select an application status 5 From the Application menu select an application and then click Submit IVIAKE SURE THE FILE NAME YOU WANT TO SCAN TO IS NOT ALREADY IN USE Verify that the file to which you want to scan is not open by another application or user To help prevent errors make sure either Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file is selected in the destination configuration settings ADJUST THE SCAN SETTINGS In the destination configuration settings lower the scan settings For example lower the scan resolution disable Color or change the Content type to Text CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT If you still cannot isolate the problem then contact customer support Troubleshooting 299 Solving option problems Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installe
101. 00 sheet tray and the multipurpose feeder It also includes information about paper orientation setting the Paper Size and Paper Type and linking and unlinking trays Setting the paper size and type The Paper Size setting is automatically sensed according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the multipurpose feeder The Paper Size setting for the multipurpose feeder must be set manually from the Paper Size menu The Paper Type setting must be set manually for all trays that do not contain plain paper From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Paper Size Type gt select a tray gt select the paper size or type gt Submit Configuring Universal paper settings The Universal Paper Size is a user defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer menus Set the Paper Size for the specified tray to Universal when the size you want is not available from the Paper Size menu Then specify all of the following Universal size settings for your paper Units of Measure Portrait Width Portrait Height Notes The largest supported Universal size is 216 x 1219 mm 8 5 x 48 in e The smallest supported Universal size is 76 x 127 mm 3 x 5 in and loaded in the multipurpose feeder only 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Universal Setup gt Units of Measure gt select a unit of measure 2 Touch Portrait Width or Portrai
102. 08 Scan Center features 142 Scan screen options 143 scan to computer advanced options setting 144 options 143 144 original size 143 paper orientation setting 144 Scan to Network 30 scan troubleshooting cannot scan from a computer 294 partial document or photo scans 293 scan was not successful 292 scanner unit does not close 290 scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 292 345 ScanBack Utility using 142 scanner Automatic Document Feeder ADF 22 functions 21 scanner glass 22 Scanner automatic feeder cover open 277 scanner glass cleaning 241 scanner glass flatbed copying using 103 scanning from a flash drive 142 quick copy 102 to a computer 141 to an FTP address 136 to an FTP using address book 137 scanning to a computer 141 scanning to a flash drive 142 scanning to an FTP address creating shortcuts using the computer 137 using shortcut numbers 136 using the address book 137 using the touch screen 136 Security Audit Log menu 177 security lock 34 sending a fax 128 sending a fax using shortcuts 129 sending a fax using the touch screen 128 sending fax using shortcuts 129 using the address book 129 sending fax at a scheduled time 130 sending fax using the address book 129 Serial x menu 171 serial printing setting up 66 Set Date Time menu 178 setting TCP IP address 164 setting the fax number or station number 126 setting the outgoing fax name or station name 126 setting the paper size 74 setting
103. 1 aile Non nU PER 235 Securing the memory before moving the printer 237 Statement of Volatility 5 e io eret ere ere e a aa baa A LEEREN Ne HX AVR FEQ REPE eh Getae 237 Erasing volatile MEMOTY ccccccesesssssceceescesesnsaueceecceecessesesesausaeeecesecssesseeususaeeesescesessuausaeeeeesaasaeeeeeeeesss 237 Erasing non volatile memory ici eet ek t ree d de DIOS eae beau Ea ita 238 Erasing printer hard disk MEMOL c ceseesesseceeceeceecessessessuseeeceecessesnssaueseeeeeecessesesesssaaseseeeseseeseeeees 238 Configuring printer hard disk encryption esses ene nennen nnne nns nans 239 Maintaining the printer ie rre doeet cod av ste sauna t veau paa e devo eunt 240 Cleaning the exterior of the Printer cccccecesssccccceceeceeeeeeseeseensnsnsaeececeeeeececeesessesesesauauessseesaeaeeseeees 240 cleaning the scanrer glass z xe re eost et it Tu d Re red deed 241 Cleaning the ADF parts ici ce ere eene eee haee ee ee shits Enea ae o ERR TEE aea a ea satis dennis exo eV a ELE das 242 Cleaning the printhead lenses cccccccccccecessssessnsnsseeeceecesceseseseusaeeseeesssssnsnsseeeseeeesesesusasasauseegusasanaaeees 244 Storing Supplies i epe EHE NOR DUNT RE EA SERRE ERN ERR UID es REED RT a 245 Checking the status of supplies esee eene nennen nennen enne sene nite tres sientas 245 Checking the status of supplies from the printer control panel
104. 22 Insert hole punch box 273 Insert staple cartridge 273 Install bin x 273 Install envelope feeder 273 Install Tray x 273 installing a memory card 38 installing an Internal Solutions Port 42 installing on a wireless network using Windows 58 installing options order of installation 52 341 installing printer on wireless network 58 installing printer hard disk 46 installing printer on a network wired networking 62 installing printer on a wireless network using Macintosh 60 installing printer software 56 adding options 57 installing the 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder 53 installing the 550 sheet tray 53 internal print server troubleshooting 301 Internal Solutions Port changing port settings 65 installing 42 troubleshooting 300 IPv6 menu 165 J jams avoiding 257 locating jam areas 257 locations 257 numbers 257 jams clearing 200 paper jam 259 201 paper jam 259 202 203 paper jams 260 230 paper jam 261 231 239 paper jams 262 24x paper jam 262 250 paper jam 263 280 289 paper jam 264 280 299 242 290 292 paper jams 265 400 403 paper jams 265 431 438 paper jams 266 455 staple jam 266 460 461 paper jams 265 Job Accounting menu 223 L labels paper tips 97 letterhead copying on 103 loading 2000 sheet high capacity feeder 78 Index loading multipurpose feeder 96 loading trays 96 letterhead printing 96 light colored line white line or incorrectly colored line appears on prints 305 light indi
105. 4 Copying iri black lt and White tec e erede tret ecc ett echa e domo cce cae dte ue Te ERR eee 104 Copyirig to different sI2e 1 5 ette aset inde eee vcr eei es 104 Making copies using paper from a selected tray cccccsscccccssssssseceeceesseeceeessesnseeecesseseaeecesseesusaeesesseesneeeeens 104 Copying different paper sizes o taedet n tette tie ted edet Pie ete eee eta 105 Copying on both sides of the paper duplexing oocoococcoononcnonancconnnnononnnnononononononnonnnconnnno nono nn nne nnne nnn nnn 105 Reducing or enlarginig copies ie dodo 106 Adjusting copy quality A e tue cte toten e Ne de tu edes 106 NS A O ca AR ee eae EEE EEA es 107 Placing separator sheets between COPIES ccesseccccessssssececesssseusesesesseeeeceessssseeescesesseeeeeseesuseeseesesesenseeeeees 107 Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet cccconoccccncnnooooonnconononnnnnnnonnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnncnnnnnanonnnos 108 Creating a custom copy job job build sees eee nennen nenne reset nsns 108 Placing information on COPICS cccceeeessssseceecceecessesssnsssaneeceeceeceecessessnsaseseeceessessesesseseseeseeeeeeseeeeseees 109 Placing the date and time at the top of each page eee nennen nnne seseeeeees 109 Placing an overlay message on each page ccccsesseccccessesssececesssssecescesseececessesnseeeceesssseecesceesseaeeeesesesaeeeeees 109 Canceling a COPY JOD uoi oes edere l
106. 5 Specifies the contrast of the scanned image Note Best for content is the factory default setting Mirror Image Off On Creates a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 219 Menu item Negative Image Off Description Creates a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting On Shadow Detail Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image 4 to 4 Note 0 is the factory default setting ADF Skew Fix Specifies whether or not to fix slight skew on the scanned image off Note Off is the factory default setting On Scan edge to edge off Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge to edge Note Off is the factory default setting On Sharpness Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image 1 5 Note 3 is the factory default setting Temperature Enables the user to specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer Ato4 output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default Print Settings Copies Specifies a default number of copies for each print job 1 999 Note 1 is the factory default setting Paper Source Tray x Manual Paper MP Feeder Manual Envelope Sets a default paper source for all print jobs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Colo
107. 8 hours before printing Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period Grain direction Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper Grain is either grain long running the length of the paper or grain short running the width of the paper For 60 135 8 m 16 36 Ib bond paper grain long paper is recommended For papers heavier than 135 g m grain short is recommended Paper and specialty media guidelines 86 Fiber content Most high quality xerographic paper is made from 100 chemically treated pulped wood This content provides the paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality Paper containing fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling Selecting paper Using appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble free printing To help avoid jams and poor print quality Always use new undamaged paper Before loading paper know the recommended print side of the paper This information is usually indicated on the paper package Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand Do not mix paper sizes types or weights in the same source mixing results in jams Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing Selecting preprinted form
108. 88 Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong PaPeT cccconccnnnnccnonocccnononcnnnancnnnnnnccnnancn nono eene enn nene ener 288 Incorrect characters Primicia ere itcr eade veri ei re Ed due eye AA dea y ea To Rd TES 288 Trayi linking does Not Wok iii tete iria 288 Large jobs donot collate meti e a aiii 289 Unexpected page breaks OCCUM ccccceesceceeseeceeseeeceseeesceseeeceaees ceaeeesaaeseseaeeseaaaecseaaeesesuaeeeeaaeesceseaeesseeaeeeeaaes 289 Solving copy probl MS esiseina eean nnns nE reau EEEE na in anaa eant oraa eS Ee 289 Copier does not respond ce tec eet ecce a a a ltda 289 Scanner unit does MOL close ee iei dana 290 POOF COPY QUAY MS 290 Partial document OF photo copiess died 291 SolVing scanner problerns aeree dee ERR ee rae de e ER o ERE Y eet dotes 292 Checking an unresponsive scanner eese nennen nennen enhn nnne nnenn nasi nne nnn nine e nni rennen seni nnns 292 SCAN Was not successful feo Re e RR EH HOY Ee TREE EE RERO AREE RE 292 Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer cccccnocccccccnoooncnnnononnnonnnnonononnncnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn senes 292 Poor scanned image quality t e ee ere etre eet tete e ve dee eere e e e E p E need 293 Partial document or photo sc ns aee aie idee E Ride anres ea Re Eo Rela oe eed 293 Cannot scan froma computer dee ee ee aa ads 294 Solving Tax proble Mii He n a nte a A AAA Beata a de oa tenu ha nd La ee Dh 294 Fax and e mail functi
109. B i SAEN PIRE Z7 SRI 4 LAUS m JEDE MUR Ud ER TJ MESICUC FSU Notices 324 Power consumption Product power consumption The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product Note Some modes may not apply to your product Watts Printing The product is generating hard copy output from electronic inputs 1000 W Copy The product is generating hard copy output from hard copy original documents 1050 W Scan The product is scanning hard copy documents 115 W Ready The product is waiting for a print job 70 W Sleep Mode The product is in a high level energy saving mode 17 W Hibernate The product is in a low level energy saving mode 0 75 W Off The product is plugged into a wall outlet but the power switch is turned off ow The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time averaged measurements Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average Values are subject to change See www lexmark com for current values Sleep Mode This product is designed with an energy saving mode called Sleep Mode The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product is not used for a specified period of time called the Sleep Mode Timeout Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product in minutes 30 By using the c
110. Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document for notes Separator Sheet Source Tray x Manual Feeder Specifies the paper source for separator sheets Notes Tray 1 is the factory default setting From the Paper menu Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for Manual Feeder to appear as a menu setting Blank Pages Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job Do Not Print Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Print Print Settings Setup menu Menu item Description Printer Language PS Emulation PCL Emulation Sets the default printer language Notes PS Emulation is the factory default setting PostScript emulation uses a PS interpreter for processing print jobs PCL Emulation uses a PCL interpreter for processing print jobs Setting a printer language default does not prevent a software program from sending print jobs that use another printer language Job Waiting Off On Specifies if print jobs are removed from the print queue when they require unavailable printer options or custom settings These print jobs are stored in a separate print queue so other jobs print normally When the missing information and or options are obtained the stored jobs print Notes e Offis the factory default setting This menu item appears
111. Custom Type x 151 Description Specifies the type of paper being manually loaded Note Plain Paper is the factory default setting Manual Envelope Size 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope B5 Envelope Other Envelope 7 3 4 Envelope 9 Envelope Specifies the size of the envelope being manually loaded Note 10 Envelope is the US factory default setting DL Envelope is the international factory default setting Manual Envelope Type Envelope Rough Envelope Custom Type x Specifies the type of envelope being manually loaded Note Envelope is the factory default setting Note Only installed trays are listed in this menu Configure MP menu Menu item Configure MP Cassette Manual First Description Determines when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder Notes Cassette is the factory default setting Cassette configures the multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual feed print jobs First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source Understanding printer menus 152 Substitute Size menu Menu item Description Substitute Size Substitutes a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available All Listed Notes Off Statement A5 de aay is the factory default setting All available size substitutions are Letter A4 2 owen Off indicates no size subst
112. DF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF adjust the paper guides From the home screen navigate to FTP gt FTP gt A gt enter the name of recipient gt Browse shortcuts gt name of recipient gt Search Creating shortcuts Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the printer control panel each time you want to send a document to an FTP server you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number There are two methods for creating shortcut numbers using the Embedded Web Server or using the printer touch screen Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Click Settings Under Other Settings click Manage Shortcuts Note A password may be required If you do not have an ID and password get one from your system support person Click FTP Shortcut Setup Enter the appropriate information Enter a shortcut number If you enter a numbe
113. ED PROPERLY Load the original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass IVIAKE SURE THE SHORTCUT NUMBER IS SET UP PROPERLY Checkto make sure the shortcut number has been programmed for the number that you want to dial Asan alternative dial the telephone number manually Received fax has poor print quality Try one or more of the following RESEND THE DOCUMENT Ask the person who sent you the fax to e Check that the quality of the original document is satisfactory Resend the fax There may have been a problem with the quality of the telephone line connection Increase the fax scan resolution if possible REPLACE THE CARTRIDGE When 88 Cartridge low appears or when the prints appear faded replace the cartridge MIAKE SURE THE FAX TRANSMISSION SPEED IS NOT SET TOO HIGH Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup Troubleshooting 298 3 In the Max Speed box click one of the following 2400 4800 9600 14400 336
114. Erasing non volatile memory 4 Individual settings device and network settings security settings and embedded solutions Erase information and settings by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu Fax data Erase fax settings and data by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu Turn off the printer Hold down J and ST while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully powered up the touch screen displays a list of functions instead of the standard home screen icons Touch Wipe All Settings The printer will reboot several times during this process Note Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings solutions jobs faxes and passwords on the printer Touch Back gt Exit Config Menu The printer will power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Erasing printer hard disk memory Note Your printer may not have a hard disk installed Configuring Disk Wiping in the printer menus enables you to remove residual confidential material left by scan print copy and fax jobs by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion Using the printer control panel 1 2 Turn off the printer Hold down B and EMS while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears
115. Faxing 131 4 Touch the arrows to adjust the time the fax will be transmitted The time is increased or decreased in increments of 30 minutes If the current time is shown the left arrow is unavailable 5 Touch Fax It Note The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time Viewing a fax log 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Reports gt Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log Blocking junk faxes 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings Fax Settings Analog Fax Setup Block No Name Fax Notes This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or no fax station name n the Banned Fax List field enter the phone numbers or fax station names of specific fax callers you want to block Canceling an outgoing fax Canceling a fax while the original documents are still
116. For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Troubleshooting 294 Cannot scan from a computer These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages CHECK THE POWER Make sure the printer is plugged in the power is on and Ready appears CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer Solving fax problems Fax and e mail functions are not set up The indicator light blinks red until you set up fax and e mail To set up fax and e mail follow these steps Note Before completing these instructions for a printer on a network make sure the fax cables are connected 1 From the home screen navigate to gt General Settings gt Run initial setup gt Yes gt Submit 2 Turn the printer off and then turn it back on 3 From the printer control panel touch your language 4 Touch your country or region and then touch Continue 5 Select your time zone and then touch Continue 6 Touch Fax and E mail to clear the icons and then touch Continue Note You can use these same steps to disable fax and e mail Caller ID is not shown Contact your telecommunications company to verify that your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns you may have to change the default setting There are two settings available
117. GH FINISHES CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type setting For Windows users check this setting from Print Properties For Macintosh users check this setting from the Print dialog IVIAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER When 88 xx color cartridge low appears make sure the toner is distributed evenly within the print cartridge 1 Remove the print cartridge Warning Potential Damage Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs 2 Firmly shake the cartridge side to side and front to back several times to redistribute the toner 3 Reinsert the print cartridge Note If print quality does not improve then replace the print cartridge If the problem continues then the printer may need to be serviced For more information contact customer support Troubleshooting 309 IVIAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE PRINT CARTRIDGE Replace the defective print cartridge Printer is printing blank pages Try one or more of the following IVIAKE SURE THERE IS NO PACKING MATERIAL LEFT ON THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE Remove the cartridge and make sure the packing material is properly removed Reinstall the cartridge IVIAKE SURE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER When 88 xx color cartridge low appears m
118. Germany Switzerland reland United Kingdom Italy Faxing 126 For some countries or regions a telephone line adapter is included in the box Use this adapter to connect an answering machine telephone or other telecommunications equipment to the printer 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the adapter and then connect the adapter to the active telephone wall jack Note Your telephone adapter may look different than the one shown It will fit the wall jack used in your location Setting the outgoing fax or station name and number 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup 3 In the Fax Name or Station Name field enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes 4 In the Fax Number or Station Number field enter the printer fax number 5 Click Submit Setting the date and time You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send If there is a power failure then you may have to reset the date and time 1 Type the printer IP address in
119. Header Footer Use to turn on Date Time Page number Bates number or Custom text and prints them in the specified header or footer location Margin Shift Use to increase the size of the margin of an specified distance by shifting the scanned image This can be useful in providing space to bind or hole punch copies Use the increase or decrease arrows to set how much of a margin you want If the additional margin is too large then the copy will be cropped Overlay Use to create a watermark or message that overlays the content of your copy You can choose between Urgent Confidential Copy and Draft or you can enter a custom message in the Enter custom text field The word you pick will appear faintly in large print across each page Note A custom overlay can also be created by your system support person When a custom overlay is created a button with an icon of that overlay will be available Paper Saver Use to print two or more sheets of an original document together on the same page Paper Saver is also called N up printing The N stands for Number For example 2 up would print two pages of your document on a single page and 4 up would print four pages of your document on a single page Touching Print Page Borders adds or removes the outline border surrounding the original document pages on the output page Separator Sheets Use to place a blank piece of paper between copies pages or print jobs The separator sheets can be
120. IVIAKE SURE THERE IS NO PROBLEM WITH YOUR PRINTER From the printer control panel check the status If necessary follow the recovery instructions IVIAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS READY TO PRINT Make sure Ready appears on the display before sending a print job CHECK IF A SUPPLY IS MISSING OR NEEDS REPLACEMENT Remove and then reinstall or replace the supply CHECK IF THE STANDARD EXIT BIN IS FULL Remove the paper stack from the standard exit bin CHECK IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY Load paper in the tray Troubleshooting 287 IVIAKE SURE THE CORRECT PRINTER SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED Verify that you are using the correct printer software fthe printer is connected to your computer through a USB port then make sure you are running a supported operating system and using a compatible printer software MAKE SURE THE INTERNAL PRINT SERVER IS WORKING PROPERLY Make sure the internal print server is properly installed and that the printer is connected to the network Print a network setup page and check that the status shows Connected If the status is Not Connected then check the network cables and then try printing the network setup page again Contact your system support person to make sure the network is functioning correctly The printer software is available on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com MAKE SURE YOU ARE USING A RECOMMENDED USB SERIAL OR ETHERNET CABLE For more information visit the Lexmark Web
121. Industry Canada technical specifications The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The terminus of an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling Telephone companies report that electrical surges typically lightning transients are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources This has been identified as a major nationwide problem It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated and certified by UL Underwriter s Laboratories another NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory or a recognized safety certification body in Notices 327 the country region of use This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks Avis r serv aux utilisateurs du r seau t l phonique du Canada Ce produit est conforme aux sp cifications techniques d Industrie Canada Le num ro REN ringer equivalence number num ro d quivalence de sonnerie fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pou
122. JPEG Quality Mirror Image Negative Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail Sharpness and Temperature before scanning a document Custom Job Use this to combine multiple scan jobs into a single scan job Edge Erase Use this to remove smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scanned image Transmission Log Use this to print the transmission log or transmission error log Understanding printer menus Understanding printer menus Menus list Supplies Replace Supply Cyan Cartridge Magenta Cartridge Yellow Cartridge Black Cartridge Separator Pick Assembly and Roller Waste Toner Bottle Fuser Transfer Module Staples Hole Punch Box Security Edit Security Setups Miscellaneous Security Settings Confidential Print Disk Wiping Security Audit Log Set Date and Time Option Card Menu Paper Menu Default Source Paper Size Type Configure MP Substitute Size Paper Texture Paper Weight Paper Loading Custom Types Custom Names Custom Scan Sizes Custom Bin Names Universal Setup Bin Setup Network Ports Active NIC Standard Network or Network x Standard USB Parallel x Serial x SMTP Setup A list of installed download emulators DLEs appears Reports Menu Settings Page Device
123. L Aaea Eea aria 285 88 xx Color cartridge very lOW ccescsscceccessssececessessseececesssseeesesessseeesesesseceeseseeesaeeeseusessuaeeeesesseseaseeessessnaaaes 285 88 xx Color cartridge critically low sees nnne nnne nennen nnne nennen enne 285 840 01 Scanner disabled by admin s line dri iaa aa a e aE e i a aiaa 285 840 02 Scanner disabled Contact system administrator if problem persists oocccnonococcncnonononnnnnncnnnnnnnos 285 1565 Emulation error load emulation option oooocccccnonccnnononoonnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnncnnnnnn no nonnnnnnns 286 Solving Printing Problems iere iere EX Pepe ane eee E ER a aeree and legate Lye che gen basta FETTE Ye rad 286 Multiple language PDF files do not priNt ooocoococonoccncncccconancconancncnnoncnnnnncncnnnncannn ca nano nennt nnnet nnne enn tese nnne nenne 286 Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds oooooccccci ncccnonoccconanccnonanconannnc conan cono ncanano ne 286 Error message about reading USB drive appears coooccnocccnnocccnnoncncnnancnnnonannnconccnnnnnccnnanc nn cnn nano nn an n cnn nana no marnan 286 Printjobs do MOt Pic ia 286 Confidential and other held jobs do not print cccceecsceceseneeeecneeceseaeeeeaaeceeceesaeeceeneeessaeeceesaeeees enne nnne 287 Print job takes longer than expected ceceesccesesceeceeeeeeceaeeeeceaeeeeaeeceaaeecseaaeesesaaeceeaeessnaeeseaaeeeeeeeaeeseeeaeeeeeaes 2
124. LEXMARK X790 Series User s Guide September 2011 www lexmark com Machine type s 7562 4917 Model s 432 436 dn1 dn2 gd1 gd2 dt1 dt2 gt1 gt2 df1 df2 gf1 gf2 d01 d02 g01 g02 t01 t02 g91 g92 f01 f02 g81 g82 Contents 2 Contents Safety information ssssssessssssecssosseseossssecsessessesosessesosssesossesecssosessseseese L Learning about the priori LO Thank you for choosing this printer cccccccccnonononoononcnnononanonann eene nnne nennen nennen innare nnne een nennen nnn 18 Finding information about the printer coooononococonnncnnnncnnnnnononannnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnon nnnm nnns rsen nene n nnn nennen 18 Selecting a location for the printe srecetina enu e unaa causes paa Eee a eade n Mee RE Rar qe 19 Printer configuratiOns ero roit eiae vea utere re FE eoe tne TRI eT eese Res re ea a aso ye eeu ea ere ERU dee da eaa Eod Pure eod 20 Basic functions of the SCANNET cceescecesnseeceeseeneceeeeeecescenececseeaeeeeecesuaeecesuaeeceeseanaeeeseseaeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeeaes 21 Understanding the ADF and scanner glass esses eese nen nnnm nnn nennen nennen nenne 22 Understanding the printer control Panel ccs csssccccccccsssssssssnaeseeceeceeceesessesesessseaueaeeseeeeeeeeesseseseseeees 23 Understanding the home SCFEON ccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccecee D Understanding the home Screen eter ceto enema Teen ne an RE SCR n RR a
125. Load Manual Feeder with custom type NAME cccccccsscccccsssssnseceecessseceecesceseeeecesseseusececssaseeseesensaasaeeeeens 275 Load Manual Feeder with custom string enne n nennen nnn 275 Load Manual Feeder with paper size ccccccssseccccsssssssccecesssessecesceeseeceeessesseeeceessssaecseesnseeessessesesaeeesens 275 Load Manual Feeder with paper type paper Size occcoocoococnnoconoonnnnnnonanannnonononnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnns 275 Load RE A A A xc ERR A A A ee eee 275 Memory full cannot print faxes a a ar a aa a e a aaa aa o a e a Aa A ea dadine iaa aeeai aidi oar annienta 275 Contents 12 Reattach Din litis 276 Reattach bin py sy EE A A E ea ee od 276 Remove packaging material area name enne ne nennen rennen 277 Remove paper from standard output biN cconnoooccncnnonooannnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnanonnnnnonononnnonannnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanannnnnnncnnns 277 Remove paper from bin x 5 cree ede Ree testet eere se ra iaaa iaaa iniaeeai badii iriiria idare 277 Remove paper from all bins ed bio biis llo btt 277 Remove paper from linked set bin name esses eene nennn n ener enne 277 Restore held jsi eti oaea aeri etate caetero edd Aai od Pe e E RE Ed ed 277 Scanner automatic feeder cover open a reas toe oiia a iaaa aa oran a aa Aa aaia apai ia aaret aia ia iamai 277 SHAE FINISHER tothe left 5 ert e nre ree eerte tata e Pe aaa aE eaaa aaea 277 Some held jobs we
126. NSE oeda a nen nere enne sen ennn ness inen tes iet een essetis ness en Eda 132 Content dee di dime Ree O ONO 132 Resol te dde daddete m OS 132 DES ui A A A tees 133 soll Er 133 PaO SOtu Dissiscs n rD ceded ectucteteatetenesuade seus cdas 133 krdgiul p 133 Delayed Send oe a e Ld Oe vL eee EY t ERE aad 133 Advanced Options tete Reiten edu ten enata e 133 Holding and forwarding faxes cccccecssssssssceccececeeceeceseeeensesnsaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesssesesesnsseeeeseeeeeesseseeseeeeseeeeees 134 HON TIE ht eed AS A it By 134 Forwarding a A O 134 Scanning to an FTP IAE miocarditis 20 Scanning toan FTP address eed ede een seno tee ten eR ENS REA E Tode 136 Scanning to an FTP address using the touch SCrE N cccesessccescessssececesesesseeeceescsseceesessuseeecesesaueeesseessenaaaes 136 Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number ccccccessssecceecssceecessssseeecseessseeceeessessaeeeeesssseeseseneeees 136 Scanning to an FTP address using the address book cc cccccsssscccessesssececeesssseecescessseeceeeseeaeeesssesaeeeeeseseees 137 Creating Shortcuts ao 137 Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server cccssscccccssseseeeceesssenseecseeesseeceeesesesesesesseeeess 137 Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen ccccccccsesssseceecessneaeecessessseeeceesssececsssssuaeeeseseaeaeeeessessensaaes 138 U
127. Note Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing Repeat and Reserve jobs are held in the printer until you choose to delete them For Windows Users 1 With a document open click File gt Print and then click Properties Preferences Options or Setup 2 Click Other Options Print and Hold 3 Select the print job type Confidential Repeat Reserve or Verify and then assign a user name For a confidential print job also enter a four digit PIN 4 Click OK or Print 5 Gotothe printer to release the print job From the home screen For confidential print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt your user name gt Confidential Jobs gt your PIN gt your print job name gt number of copies gt Print For other print jobs navigate to Held jobs your user name your print job name number of copies Print For Macintosh users 1 With a document open choose File gt Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see more options 2 From the print options or Copies amp Pages pop up menu choose Job Routing 3 Select your print job type Confidential Repeat Reserve or Verify and then assign a user name For a confidential print job also enter a four digit PIN 4 Click OK or Print 5 Gotothe printer to release the print job Printing 100 From the home screen For confidential print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt your user name gt Confidential Jobs gt
128. Note Inches is the US factory default setting Millimeters is the Millimeters international factory default setting Portrait Width Sets the portrait width 3 48 inches Notes 76 1219 mm e f the width exceeds the maximum then the printer uses the maximum width allowed 8 5 inches is the US factory default setting 216 mm is the international factory default setting The width can be increased in 0 01 inch or in 1 mm increments Understanding printer menus z Menu item Portrait Height 3 48 inches 76 1219 mm 159 Description Sets the portrait height Notes Ifthe height exceeds the maximum then the printer uses the maximum height allowed 14 inches is the US factory default setting 356 mm is the international factory default setting The height can be increased in 0 01 inch or in 1 mm increments Feed Direction Short Edge Long Edge Specifies the feed direction Notes Short Edge is the factory default setting Long Edge appears only if the longest edge is shorter than the maximum width supported in the tray Bin Setup menu Menu item Output Bin Standard Bin Bin x Description Specifies the default exit bin Note Standard Bin is the factory default setting Configure Bins Mailbox Link Mail Overflow Link Optional Type Assignment Specifies configuration options for exit bins Notes Mailbox is the factory default setting This setting tre
129. Notes Bottom right Off e Off is the factory default setting for Bottom right Date Time All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Custom text 193 Understanding printer menus Menu item Overlay Off Confidential Copy Draft Urgent Custom Description Specifies the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job Note Off is the factory default setting Custom Overlay Specifies the custom overlay text Note A maximum of 64 characters is allowed Allow priority copies On Off Allows interruption of a print job to copy a page or document Note On is the factory default setting Custom Job scanning Off On Lets you copy in a single copy job a document that contains mixed paper sizes Notes Off is the factory default setting This menu item appears only if a valid printer hard drive is installed Allow Save as Shortcut On Off Lets you save custom copy settings as shortcuts Note On is the factory default setting Background Removal 4 to 4 Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Auto Center Off On Lets you automatically center the content on the page Note Off is the factory default setting Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Enables an equal balance o
130. Off or Paper Offisthe factory default setting for Sleep Mode if Eco Mode is set to Energy or Energy Paper Dimis the factory default setting for Sleep Mode if Eco Mode is set to Off or Paper Error Lighting On Off Determines if indicator lights blink when the printer encounters errors Note On is the factory default setting Audio Feedback Button Feedback On Off Volume 1 10 Notes Onisthe factory default setting for Button Feedback e 5 is the factory default setting for Volume Tactile Touchscreen Feedback On Off Specifies whether the printer control panel provides touch sensation feedback Show Bookmarks Yes No Specifies whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area Note Yes is the factory default setting When Yes is selected bookmarks appear in the Held Jobs area Allow Background Removal On Off Specifies whether image background removal is allowed during copy fax e mail FTP or scan to USB jobs Note On is the factory default setting The background of the image will be removed Allow Custom Job Scans On Off Lets you scan multiple documents into one file Note On is the factory default setting If On is selected then the Allow Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific jobs Scanner Jam Recovery Job level Page level Specifies how a scan job should be reloaded if a paper jam occurs in the ADF Notes f Job level is se
131. PLIERS OR REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY ANY WARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD ALL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS PRICES AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE Limitation of liability Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document For any claim concerning performance or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty you may recover actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph Lexmark s liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product that caused the damages This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS LOST SAVINGS INCIDENTAL DAMAGE OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party
132. PRICE PAID FOR THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM AND FIVE U S DOLLARS OR THE EQUIVALENT IN LOCAL CURRENCY YOUR SOLE REMEDY AGAINST LEXMARK IN ANY DISPUTE UNDER THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL BE TO SEEK TO RECOVER ONE OF THESE AMOUNTS UPON PAYMENT OF WHICH LEXMARK SHALL BE RELEASED AND DISCHARGED OF ALL FURTHER OBLIGATIONS AND LIABILITY TO YOU IN NO EVENT WILLLEXMARK ITS SUPPLIERS SUBSIDIARIES OR RESELLERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INCIDENTAL INDIRECT EXEMPLARY PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS OR REVENUES LOST SAVINGS INTERRUPTION OF USE OR ANY LOSS OF INACCURACY IN OR DAMAGE TO DATA Notices 335 OR RECORDS FOR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES OR DAMAGE TO REAL OR TANGIBLE PROPERTY FOR LOSS OF PRIVACY ARISING OUT OR IN ANY WAY RELATED TO THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM OR OTHERWISE IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PROVISION OF THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT REGARDLESS OF THE NATURE OF THE CLAIM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY AND EVEN IF LEXMARK OR ITS SUPPLIERS AFFILIATES OR REMARKETERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY YOU BASED ON ATHIRD PARTY CLAIM EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THIS EXCLUSION OF DAMAGES IS DETERMINED LEGALLY INVALID THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDIES FAIL OF THEIR ESSENTIAL PURPOSE 4 U S A STATE LAWS This Software Limited
133. S NO DEFECTIVE PRINT CARTRIDGE Replace the defective print cartridge IVIAKE SURE THE TRANSFER BELT IS NOT DEFECTIVE Replace the defective transfer belt For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part Paper curl Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings 2 Before sending the print job specify the correct paper type setting For Windows users specify the paper type from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the paper type from the Print dialog LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it Print irregularities Try one or more of the following LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it Troubleshooting 307 CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings 2 Before sending the print job specify the correct paper type setting For Windows users specify the paper type from Print Properties Fo
134. The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully powered up the touch screen displays a list of functions instead of the standard home screen icons Touch Wipe Disk and then touch one of the following Wipe disk fast This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass Wipe disk secure This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times followed by a verification pass A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220 22 M standard for securely erasing data from a hard disk Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task Note Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks 5 Touch Back gt Exit Config Menu The printer will power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Securing the memory before moving the printer 239 Configuring printer hard disk encryption Note Your printer may not have a hard disk installed Enabling hard disk encryption helps prevent the loss of sensitive data in the event your printer or its hard disk is stolen Using the Embedded Web Server 1 From the Embedded Web Server click Settings gt Security gt Disk Encryption Note Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a for
135. Type x name under the Custom Types and Paper Size and Type menus 3 Click Custom Types gt select a paper type gt Submit Assigning a custom paper type name Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Paper Size Type gt select a custom paper type name gt select a tray gt Submit Configuring a custom name If the printer is on a network then you can use the Embedded Web Server to define a name other than Custom Type x for each of the custom paper types loaded into the printer 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu gt Custom Types gt select the custom name you want to configure gt select a paper or specialty media type Submit Paper and specialty media guidelines 85 Paper and specialty media guidelines Paper guidelines Paper characteristics The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability Consider these characteristics when evaluating new paper stock Weight The printer can automatically feed paper weights from 60 to 176 g m 16 to 47 Ib
136. Warranty gives you specific legal rights You may also have other rights that vary from state to state Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or the exclusion of limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations may not apply to you 5 LICENSE GRANT Lexmark grants you the following rights provided you comply with all terms and conditions of this License Agreement a Use You may Use one 1 copy of the Software Program The term Use means storing loading installing executing or displaying the Software Program If Lexmark has licensed the Software Program to you for concurrent use you must limit the number of authorized users to the number specified in your agreement with Lexmark You may not separate the components of the Software Program for use on more than one computer You agree that you will not Use the Software Program in whole or in part in any manner that has the effect of overriding modifying eliminating obscuring altering or de emphasizing the visual appearance of any trademark trade name trade dress or intellectual property notice that appears on any computer display screens normally generated by or as a result of the Software Program b Copying You may make one 1 copy of the Software Program solely for purposes of backup archiving or installation provided the copy contains all of the original Software Program s proprietary notices You may not copy the Softwa
137. abled 281 56 Standard USB port disabled 281 56 USB port x disabled 281 57 Configuration change some held jobs were not restored 282 58 Input config error 283 58 Too many bins attached 282 58 Too many disks installed 282 58 Too many flash options installed 282 58 Too many trays attached 282 59 Incompatible output bin x 283 62 Disk full 283 80 xx Fuser life warning 283 80 xx Fuser missing 284 80 xx Fuser near life warning 283 80 xx Replace fuser 284 82 xx Replace waste toner bottle 284 82 xx Waste toner bottle missing 284 82 xx Waste toner bottle nearly full 284 83 xx Replace transfer module 284 83 xx Transfer module life warning 284 83 xx Transfer module missing 284 840 01 Scanner disabled by admin 285 840 02 Scanner disabled Contact system administrator if problem persists 285 88 xx Color cartridge critically low 285 88 xx color cartridge low 285 338 88 xx color cartridge nearly low 284 A accessing the system board 35 Active NIC menu 161 adding a date and time stamp 109 ADF copying using 102 ADF kit ordering 247 ADF parts cleaning 242 Adjusting color 269 adjusting copy quality 106 adjusting Sleep Mode 70 adjusting toner darkness 93 advanced options touch screen copy 112 fax 133 FTP 140 AppleTalk menu 166 applications list home screen 29 applications home screen Forms and Favorites 29 My MFP 29 Remote Operator Panel 29 Scan to Network 29 WS Scan 29 assigning a custom paper type name 84 atta
138. ace in flash memory for resources Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in flash memory are deleted Delete fonts macros and other data stored in flash memory Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card 53 Unformatted flash detected Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing Formatthe flash memory If the error message remains the flash memory may be defective and require replacing 54 Network x software error Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to continue printing Turn the printer off wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on Upgrade flash the network firmware in the printer 54 Serial option x error Try one or more of the following Check that the serial cable is connected properly and is the correct one for the serial port Check that the serial interface parameters protocol baud parity and data bits are set correctly on the printer and on the host computer Touch Continue to continue printing Turn the printer power off and then back on to reset the printer 54 Standard network software error Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to continue printing Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer Upgrade flash the network firmware in the pri
139. ada Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes 1 cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d interf rences et 2 il doit accepter toute interf rence recue y compris celles risquant d alt rer son fonctionnement Cet appareil a t concu pour fonctionner uniquement avec l antenne fournie L utilisation de toute autre antenne est strictement interdite par la r glementation d Industry Canada En application des r glementations d Industry Canada l utilisation d une antenne de gain sup rieur est strictement interdite Pour emp cher toute interf rence radio au service faisant l objet d une licence cet appareil doit tre utilis l int rieur et loin des fen tres afin de garantir une protection optimale Si le mat riel ou son antenne d mission est install l ext rieur il doit faire l objet d une licence L installateur de cet quipement radio doit veiller ce que l antenne soit implant e et dirig e de mani re n mettre aucun champ HF d passant les limites fix es pour l ensemble de la population par Sant Canada Reportez vous au Code de s curit 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Sant Canada www hc sc gc ca rpb Notices 330 Le terme IC pr c dant le num ro de d accr ditation inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme aux sp cifications techniques d Industry Canada Notice to users in the European Union This product is in conformity with the protec
140. adjust the settings from the Paper Size Type menu Note The standard 550 sheet tray and the multipurpose feeder do not automatically sense the paper size You must set the size from the Paper Size Type menu Large jobs do not collate These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following Make SURE COLLATE IS SET TO ON From the Finishing menu or Print Properties set Collate to On Note Setting Collate to Off in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts the number and complexity of images and the number of pages in the job IVIAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS ENOUGH MEMORY Add printer memory or an optional hard disk Unexpected page breaks occur INCREASE THE PRINT TIMEOUT VALUE 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Timeouts 2 Touch the left or right arrow next to Print Timeout until the desired value appears 3 Touch Submit Solving copy problems Copier does not respond These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages Troubleshooting CHECK THE POWER Make sure the printer is plugged in the power is on and Ready appears Scanner unit does not close Make sure there are no obstructions 1 Lift the scanner unit 2 Remove any obstruction keeping t
141. ae E Ud REPE TER aae 24 Using the touch screen DUttOns ccccssssssccceecesseessenensaeeceeeceseessesesessseaeeseeseseseesseuseseeeeseesseseesseseeeeeeeees 25 Setting up and using the home screen applications 29 Accessing the Embedded Web Servel csssscsscccescessesesssssseeccssessesasaeeeceeceseessesnsssaueeseceeeesssessensaaeauaeaes 29 Activating the home screen applications esses eene nnne nnne nennen neni anna nnns 29 Exporting and importing a configuration using the Embedded Web Servel ssssssssecceceseeessessenes 32 Additional printer Sepup csiess store ev pays ene t eps kv eo ER po ROPA D9 Installing internal options ieisesesseeeeeee eene nennen nennen nnne nnn nennnn nnne nne n nnne nnnn ka sani nnns nasse 33 Available internal Options ccccsccccsssssseececesssssececesssseseecessesssencesssseseceseseeseeesessesssseeseseeasaeueeesseeenseeeeeeeseenaes 33 Using the security lock feature eere adn D A ias 34 Accessing the system DOAIC eccsscceccssscececessesseececessseseecescessseeeecsseeseseseceaueeeeeesessaeeeescuesuses cesses csesueaeeessesenaes 35 Iristalling a mernmory Gard ret retten oae en dai cies ea 38 Installing a flash memory or firmware card esses eee eene nne nnns eran n enean enne 40 Installing an Internal Solutions Port eseesssesssseeeeeeeee eene nnne ennemis enn nnnnn
142. age left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Understanding printer menus Menu item JPEG Quality Best for Content 5 90 213 Description Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Notes Best for content is the factory default setting e 5 reduces the file size but the quality of the image is lessened 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large This menu item applies to all scan functions Text Default 5 90 Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 75 is the factory default setting Text Photo Default 5 90 Sets the quality of a text photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 75 is the factory default setting Photo Default 5 90 Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 50 is the factory default setting Use Multi Page TIFF On Off Provides a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to FTP job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Notes Onisthe factory default setting This me
143. age of your original document viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs XPS Usethisto create asingle XMLPaper Specification XPS file with multiple pages viewable usingan Internet Explorer hosted viewer and the NET Framework or by downloading a third party standalone viewer 5 Touch E mail It Note If you selected Secure PDF you will be prompted to enter your password twice Canceling an e mail When using the ADF touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears e When using the scanner glass touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears or while Scan the Next Page Finish the Job appears Understanding e mail options Recipients This option lets you enter the destination of your e mail You may enter multiple e mail addresses Subject This option lets you enter a subject line for your e mail Message This option lets you enter a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment File Name This option lets you customize the attachment file name Original Size This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to e mail Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting The e mail screen appears with the new setting displayed When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes When Original Size is set to Auto Size Sense the scanner automatically determines the size of
144. ake sure that toner is distributed evenly among all four cartridges 1 Remove the cartridge Warning Potential Damage Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs 2 Firmly shake the cartridge side to side and front to back several times to redistribute the toner 3 Reinsert the cartridge Note If print quality does not improve then replace the cartridge of the color that is not printing If the problem continues then the printer may need to be serviced For more information contact customer support Repeating defects appear on prints PN Try one or more of the following Troubleshooting 310 REPLACE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE Replace the print cartridge of the color with the repeating defect if the print defects occur in the following instances in every 37 7 mm 1 48 in of the page in every 41 6 mm 1 64 in of the page in every 42 7 mm 1 68 in of the page in every 94 3 mm 3 71 in of the page REPLACE THE FUSER Replace the fuser if print defects occur in the following instances in every 95 0 mm 3 74 in of the page in every 146 7 mm 5 78 in of the page Skewed print These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES Move the length and width guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded Make sure the guides are not too far from the paper stack Make sure the g
145. ally set to Best Fit Fit Width Anchor Top Left Orientation Sets the image orientation Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Rev Portrait Rev Landscape Help menu The Help menu consists of a series of Help pages that are stored in the multifunction printer MFP as PDF files They contain information about using the printer and performing various tasks including copying scanning and faxing English French German and Spanish translations are stored in the printer Understanding printer menus 236 Other translations are available on the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com Menu item Description Print All Guides Prints all the guides Copy Guide Provides information about making copies and changing settings Fax Guide Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers shortcut numbers or the address book and about changing settings E mail Guide Provides information about sending e mails using addresses shortcut numbers or the address book and about changing settings FTP Guide Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server using an FTP address shortcut numbers or the address book and about changing settings Print Defects Guide Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints Information Guide Provides help in locating additional information Supplies Guide Provides part numbers for ordering supplies
146. ate the disk wipe Automatic Method Single pass Multiple pass Marks all disk space used by a previous print job and does not permit the file system to reuse this space until it has been cleared Notes Single pass is the factory default setting Only automatic wiping enables users to activate disk wiping without having to turn the printer off for an extended amount of time Highly confidential information should be wiped using only the Multiple pass method Manual Method Single pass Multiple pass Allows the file system to reuse marked disk space without having to wipe it first Notes Single pass is the factory default setting Highly confidential information should be wiped using the Multiple pass method only Scheduled Method Single pass Multiple pass Allows the file system to reuse marked disk space without having to wipe it first Note Single pass is the factory default setting Security Audit Log menu Menu item Description Export Log Enables an authorized user to export the security log Notes To export the log from the printer control panel a flash drive must be attached to the printer From the Embedded Web Server the log can be downloaded to a computer Delete Log Specifies whether audit logs are deleted Yes No Note Yes is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus Menu item Configure Log Enable Audit Enable Remote Sy
147. ateway Image Format Specifies the image type for scan to fax PDF pdf XPS xps TIFF tif J Understanding printer menus 204 Menu item Description Content Type Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to fax Text Notes Text Photo Graphics Text is the factory default setting Text is used when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Photo ee Text Photo is used when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Graphics is used when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Photo is used when the document being scanned is mostly a photo or an image Content Source Specifies how content will be produced Color Laser Notes Inkjet Photo Film Color Laser is the factory default setting Color Laser is used when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Magazine Newspaper Black White is used when the original document was printed using a black white laser printer Press Other Inkjet is used when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer Photo Film is used when the original document is a photo from film Magazine is used when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper is used when the original document is from a newspaper Press is used when the original document was printed using a printing press Other is used when the original d
148. ation Warranty information varies by country or region n the US See the Statement of Limited Warranty included with this printer or at http support lexmark com n other countries and regions See the printed warranty that came with your printer Selecting a location for the printer A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely When selecting a location for the printer leave enough room to open trays covers and doors If you plan to install any options leave enough room for them too It is important to e Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee 156 standard Provide a flat sturdy and stable surface e Keep the printer Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners heaters or ventilators Free from direct sunlight humidity extremes or temperature fluctuations Learning about the printer 20 Clean dry and free of dust Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation 458 mm 18 in 100 mm 3 9 in 380 mm 14 9 in 432 mm 17 in uw P wl n e 150 mm 5 9 in Printer configurations CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or pr
149. ats each bin as a separate mailbox Link configures all available bins as one large exit bin Mail Overflow assigns an overflow bin when the mailbox bins become full Link Optional links together all available exit bins except the standard bin and only appears when at least two optional bins are installed Type Assignment assigns each paper type to an exit bin or linked bin set Bins assigned the same name are automatically linked unless Link Optional is selected Overflow Bin Standard Bin Bin x Specifies an alternate exit bin when a designated bin is full Note Standard Bin is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus Menu item Assign Type Bin Plain Paper Bin Card Stock Bin Transparency Bin Recycled Bin Glossy Bin Heavy Glossy Bin Labels Bin Vinyl Labels Bin Bond Bin Envelope Bin Rough Envelope Bin Letterhead Bin Preprinted Bin Colored Bin Light Paper Bin Heavy Paper Bin Rough Cotton Bin Custom x Bin 160 Description Selects an exit bin for each supported paper type Select from the following options for each type Disabled Standard Bin Bin x Note Disabled is the factory default setting Reports menu Reports menu Menu item Menu Settings Page Description Prints a report containing information about the paper loaded into trays installed memory total page count alarms timeouts printer control panel language TCP IP addre
150. attempt to do so shall be void 7 UPGRADES To Use a Software Program identified as an upgrade you must first be licensed to the original Software Program identified by Lexmark as eligible for the upgrade After upgrading you may no longer use the original Software Program that formed the basis for your upgrade eligibility 8 LIMITATION ON REVERSE ENGINEERING You may not alter decrypt reverse engineer reverse assemble reverse compile or otherwise translate the Software Program except as and to the extent expressly permitted to do so by applicable law for the purposes of inter operability error correction and security testing If you have such statutory rights you will notify Lexmark in writing of any intended reverse engineering reverse assembly or reverse compilation You may not decrypt the Software Program unless necessary for the legitimate Use of the Software Program Notices 336 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 ADDITIONAL SOFTWARE This License Agreement applies to updates or supplements to the original Software Program provided by Lexmark unless Lexmark provides other terms along with the update or supplement TERM This License Agreement is effective unless terminated or rejected You may reject or terminate this license at any time by destroying all copies of the Software Program together with all modifications documentation and merged portions in any form or as otherwise described herein Lexmark
151. ature settings before you fax the document Custom Job Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job e Edge Erase Use to eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan Transmission Log Use to print the transmission log or transmission error log Faxing 134 Holding and forwarding faxes Holding faxes This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released Held faxes can be released manually or at a scheduled day or time 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup gt Holding Faxes 3 In the Print Faxes Password field enter a password 4 From the Held Fax Mode menu select one of the following Off Always On Manual Scheduled 5 If you selected Scheduled then continue with the following steps a Click Fax Holding Schedule b From the Action menu select Hold faxes c From the Time menu select the time you want the
152. ault setting Content Type Text Photo Photo Text Graphics Specifies the type of content that will be scanned for e mailing Notes Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Photo is used when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Text is used when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphics is used when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Photo is used when the document being scanned is mostly a photo or an image Understanding printer menus 207 Menu item Description Content Source Specifies the source of the document being scanned Color Laser Notes Inkjet Magazine Color Laser is the factory default setting Color Laser is used when the original Pres document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Laser o d the original document was printed using a ack white laser printer Photo Film Mus n q En Newspaper Inkjet is used when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer Other Photo Film is used when the original document is a photo from film Magazine is used when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper is used when the original document is from a newspaper Press is used when the original document was printed using a printing press Other is used when the original document was printed using an alternate or
153. being decommissioned The printer hard drive is being replaced The printer is being moved to a different department or location The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization The printer is being removed from your premises for service The printer is being sold to another organization Disposing of a hard drive Note Not all printers have a hard disk installed In high security environments it may be necessary to take additional steps to ensure that confidential data stored on the printer hard disk cannot be accessed once the printer or its hard disk is removed from your premises While most data can be erased electronically you may want to consider one or more of the following actions before disposing of a printer or hard disk Degaussing Flushes the hard drive with a magnetic field that erases stored data Crushing Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable Milling Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits Note While most data can be erased electronically the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to physically destroy each memory device on which data could have been stored Erasing volatile memory The volatile memory RAM installed on your printer requires a power source to retain information To erase the buffered data simply power down the device Securing the memory before moving the printer 238
154. ble paper examples Test results indicate that the following paper types are at risk for use with laser printers Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper also known as carbonless papers Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the paper Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser e Preprinted papers that require a registration the precise location on the page greater than 2 3 mm 0 9 in such as optical character recognition OCR forms In some cases registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms Coated papers erasable bond synthetic papers thermal papers Rough edged rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers Recycled papers that fail EN12281 2002 European testing Paper weighing less than 60 g m 16 Ib Multiple part forms or documents For more information about Lexmark visit www lexmark com General sustainability related information can be found at the Environmental Sustainability link Paper and specialty media guidelines 88 Storing paper Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality For best results store paper where the temperature is 21 C 70 F and the relative humidity is 40 Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18 to 24 C 65 to 75 F with relative humidity between 40 and 60 S
155. bond grain long Paper lighter than 60 g m 16 Ib might not be stiff enough to feed properly causing jams For best performance use 75 g m 20 Ib bond grain long paper For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm 7 x 10 in we recommend 90 g m 24 Ib or heavier paper Note Duplex is supported only for 75 176 g m 20 47 Ib bond paper Curl Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems Curl can occur after the paper passes through the printer where it is exposed to high temperatures Storing paper unwrapped in hot humid cold or dry conditions even in the trays can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding problems Smoothness Paper smoothness directly affects print quality If paper is too rough the toner cannot fuse to it properly If paper is too smooth it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points however smoothness between 150 and 200 Sheffield points produces the best print quality Moisture content The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 4
156. bove 80 Salty air Corrosive gases Heavy dust Checking the status of supplies A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required Checking the status of supplies from the printer control panel From the home screen touch Status Supplies gt View Supplies Checking the status of supplies from a network computer Note The computer must be connected to the same network as the printer 1 2 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Click Device Status The Device Status page appears displaying a summary of supply levels Maintaining the printer 246 Ordering supplies To order supplies in the U S contact Lexmark at 1 800 539 6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies dealers in your area In other countries or regions visit the Lexmark Web Site at www lexmark com or contact the place where you purchased the printer Notes The toner gauge is an estimate of how much toner is left in your cartridge Alllife estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter or A4 size plain paper Ordering a print cartridge When 88 color cartridge lowor88 col
157. breaker The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors uninterrupted power supplies or extension cords Other electronic equipment plugged into the outlet is working The printer is turned on Check the printer power switch The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer print server option or other network device All options are properly installed The printer driver settings are correct Once you have checked each of these possibilities turn the printer off wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on This often fixes the problem Understanding printer messages Adjusting color Wait for the process to complete An error has occurred with the USB drive Please remove and reinsert drive Try one or more of the following Remove and reinsert the flash drive e f the error message remains the flash memory may be defective and require replacement Change paper source to custom type name Try one or more of the following Touch Use current paper source to ignore the message and print from the selected tray Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu and then touch Paper changed continue Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Troubleshooting 270 Change paper source to custom type name load orientation Try one or more of the fo
158. cator 23 linking exit bins 83 linking exit bins 83 linking trays 82 Load Manual Feeder with custom string 275 Load Manual Feeder with custom type name 275 Load Manual Feeder with paper size 275 Load Manual Feeder with paper type paper size 275 Load staples 275 loading 2000 sheet high capacity feeder 78 550 sheet tray standard or optional 75 letterhead in 2000 sheet high capacity feeder 78 letterhead in multipurpose feeder 96 multipurpose feeder 80 loading card stock in multipurpose feeder 80 loading envelopes in multipurpose feeder 80 loading the multipurpose feeder 80 loading the standard tray 75 loading transparencies in multipurpose feeder 80 lock security 34 M making copies using paper from selected tray 104 memory card installing 38 troubleshooting 301 Memory full cannot print faxes 275 menu settings page printing 55 menus Active NIC 161 AppleTalk 166 Bin Setup 159 Confidential Print 176 Configure MP 151 Copy Settings 188 Custom Bin Names 158 Custom Names 157 Custom Scan Sizes 158 Custom Types 157 Default Source 148 diagram of 145 Disk Wiping 176 Edit Security Setups 174 E mail Settings 205 Fax Mode Analog Fax Setup 194 Fax Mode Fax Server Setup 203 Finishing 224 Flash Drive 215 FTP Settings 211 General Settings 179 Help 235 HTML 234 Image 235 IPv6 165 Job Accounting 223 Miscellaneous 175 Network x 161 Network Card 163 Network Reports 163 Paper Loading 155 Paper Si
159. ceesesesseeeccsscseseeecsecesseeeeeeseseuseeee ireira eiai aia 98 Printing confidential and other held jobs sesenta enne nnne 99 Printing information pages eroe ree tke te nea e De ee AERA ceo a RV Re Dn EHE Nune eren PERSE a Re SERI eo Edid 100 Printirig a font sample list 5 2 eec rm eh en er rad c are OE e EIER Eun 100 Printing a directory list neces ec edid ca dites e ERE c edad epe aa HEP a x HEP dead 100 Canceling a print JOB eves eee aa Rea Re eva e eain aeta ek re ea ae PARERE UE ieee 100 Canceling a print job from the printer control panel esses eene nennen nennen nnns 100 Canceling a print job from the computer esssssssssssseeeeee eene nennen nennen nennen inser nensi n renes enn n nnns 100 CODVIDB annonces RN VR MEN VEN CAMERE VH REM OT VY E Dea VER ee D LUZ MES A rre IERI RR O Ee PEERS RR MRE Re PUISSE PE MEET Fro re RE Pe Pe Pod ge Torre eoa 102 Making a Quick Copy etc inn av TRI I ERE TITRE 102 Copying Using the ADE cui iii 102 Copying using the scanner glass ie Un enean ie eb ig ae inb 103 Contents 5 Copying til Photos susan ipe E ede iae fa retire das eto Hct ih ee Ge Pe acta avin oa 103 Copying on specialty media eere a A 103 Copying ON trANSPALEN CIOS ivi A dla dia 103 Copying on letterhead D n eredi oin in eed tao 103 CUSEOMIZING copy Settlrigs 2 coca doses etd etae Gee eon A De to de aee Uo de a dea ee Uo dad Da dada 10
160. cesceeseececeseeseeeccssessuecsessaeeeeecesesaeeeeseseesssaaeesesenees 279 51 Defective flash detected 200 ee eecceesesceeesseceneceeesaececeneceesaeeecesaececeaeeceesaececsaeeceesaeeceeaaecessaeeceeeeaeeessneaeeneaeeees 280 52 Not enough free space in flash memory for FESOULCES ccccccesssseccesesesseeeccesessnseeeeseesseececesseenseeeseesseaees 280 53 Unformatted flash detected uet tede retirer Re eene e ean lidia cnn iii 280 54 Network x software error cessisse nennen eene ana i aitinn reas nasa ness 280 54 Serial option X eFFOF EA entes Enid ted lato eR e ete ats 280 54 Standard network software error ceesscccesssceeesseeceecaeeceeaeeeeaaeeceaaeeeeaececeeaaeeseauaeseeeceeaeeceeeaecaeeeneeseeeaeeees 280 55 Unsupported option in slot x eene nnnm nennen nennen enn sueseueeeseeseaaaaes 281 56 Parallel port x disabled I E ee tere idein AE 281 56 Serial port X disabled cete cte treten cet cede estu chase tau oo gocce o adito rueda 281 56 Standard USB port disabled esses enne eene nnne nennen retentis seinen aaaea apei lanaa 281 56 Standard parallel port disabled 2 diee aa aaa aiee a a aaiae io eiat 281 56 USB port x disabled oe aaO adas 281 57 Configuration change some held jobs were not restored occooocccnccconononnncnononnnonnncnnnannnnnncnonononnnnnanannnnnos 282 58 Too Many bins attached cto 282 58 Too many diskKs installed iesi oeni tete dec
161. ching cables 54 attaching the system board cover 35 available internal options 33 avoiding paper jams 257 B Bin Setup menu 159 black and white copying 104 black and white printing 93 blank pages 309 blocking junk faxes 131 buttons printer control panel 23 buttons touch screen using 25 Index C cables Ethernet 54 USB 54 calling customer support 318 canceling print job from computer 100 canceling a print job from a computer 100 from the printer control panel 100 cannot open Embedded Web Server 318 card stock loading in multipurpose feeder 80 tips 98 Change paper source to custom string 270 Change paper source to custom string load orientation 270 Change paper source to custom type name 269 Change paper source to custom type name load orientation 270 Change paper source to paper size paper type 270 Change paper source to paper size paper type load orientation 270 checking an unresponsive printer 269 checking an unresponsive scanner 292 checking printer status on Embedded Web Server 254 checking printer status using the Embedded Web Server 254 checking status of supplies 245 checking the status of supplies 245 checking the virtual display using the Embedded Web Server 254 checking virtual display using the Embedded Web Server 254 choosing a fax connection 123 cleaning ADF parts 242 exterior of the printer 240 scanner glass 241 cleaning kit ordering 247 cleaning the
162. claim This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark Lexmark s and its Suppliers and Remarketers limitations of remedies are not cumulative Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended beneficiaries of this limitation Additional rights Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights You may also have other rights that vary from state to state Notices 334 LEXMARK SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT BY USING THIS PRODUCT YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENT IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF THIS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENT PROMPTLY RETURN THE PRODUCT UNUSED AND REQUEST A REFUND OF THE AMOUNT YOU PAID IF YOU ARE INSTALLING THIS PRODUCT FOR USE BY OTHER PARTIES YOU AGREE TO INFORM THE USERS THAT USE OF THE PRODUCT INDICATES ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS LEXMARK SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT This License Agreement Software License Agreement is a legal agreement between you either an individual or a single entity and Lexmark International Inc Lexmark that to the extent your Lexmar
163. color cartridge part number unsupported by device 1 Remove the unsupported print cartridge and then install a supported one For instructions on removing a print cartridge touch More Information 2 Touch Continue to clear the message 34 Incorrect paper size open src Try one or more of the following Load the appropriate paper or specialty media in the proper tray Confirm that the wheel on tray 1 is set to the paper size loaded in the tray Make sure this size is the size you are trying to print Touch Continue to clear the message and print using a different tray Check length and width guides of the tray and make sure the paper is properly loaded in the tray Make sure the Print Properties or Print dialog settings have the correct paper size and type Check that the paper size is correctly set For example if the MP Feeder Size is set to Universal make sure the paper is large enough for the data being printed Cancel the print job 35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to disable Resource Save and continue printing Toenable Resource Save after receiving this message make sure the link buffers are set to Auto and then exit the menus to activate the link buffer changes When Ready appears enable Resource Save Install additional memory Troubleshooting 279 37 Insufficient memory to collate job Try one or more of the following
164. cord to a properly grounded outlet 5 Turn the printer back on 58 Input config error 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Check if all tray configurations are correct Remove unnecessary trays if needed 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on 59 Incompatible output bin x Try one or more of the following Remove the specified output bin Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified output bin 61 Remove defective disk Try one or more of the following Remove the defective printer hard disk nstall a different printer hard disk before performing any operations that require a printer hard disk 62 Disk full Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing Delete fonts macros and other data stored on the printer hard disk nstall a printer hard disk with larger capacity 80 xx Fuser near life warning 1 Order a replacement fuser immediately 2 When print quality is reduced install the new fuser following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 3 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 80 xx Fuser life warning Order a replacement fuser immediately When print quality is reduced install the new fuser following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part Touch C
165. creen navigate to Copy change the copy settings Copy It Copying 103 Copying using the scanner glass 1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner 2 From the home screen navigate to Copy change the copy settings Copy It 3 If you have more pages to scan then place the next document on the scanner glass and then touch Scan the Next Page 4 Touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen Copying film photos 1 Place a photo facedown on the upper left corner of the scanner glass 2 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Content gt Photo gt ZS gt Photo Film gt ZS gt Copy It gt Scan the Next Page or Finish the Job Copying on specialty media Copying on transparencies 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt size of the original document gt 4 Touch Copy to and then select the tray that contains transparencies or touch Manual Feeder Size 5 Load transparencies in the multipurpose feeder 6 From the home screen navigate to f gt select the desired size of the transparencies
166. ct box has a limitation of 255 characters The message box has a limitation of 512 characters E mail Server Setup Send me a copy Never appears On by default Off by default Always On Sends a copy of the e mail back to the sender Note Never appears is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus Menu item E mail Server Setup Max E mail size 0 65535 KB 206 Description Specifies the maximum e mail size in kilobytes Note E mails above the specified size are not sent E mail Server Setup Size error message Sends a message when an e mail is greater than the configured size limit E mail Server Setup Limit destinations Specifies a domain name such as a company domain name and then limits e mail destinations to that domain name only Notes E mail can be sent only to the specified domain The limit is one domain E mail Server Setup Web Link Setup Server Login Password Path Base file name Web Link Defines the e mail server path name for example directory path Note The characters lt gt are invalid entries for a path name Format PDF pdf Secure PDF TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps Specifies the format of the scanned file Note PDF pdf is the factory default setting PDF Version 1 5 1 6 A 1a 1 2 1 3 1 4 Sets the version of the PDF file that will be scanned for e mailing Note 1 5 is the factory def
167. d Try one or more of the following RESET THE PRINTER Turn the printer off wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer on CHECK TO SEE IF THE OPTION IS CONNECTED TO THE PRINTER 1 Turn the printer off using the power switch 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and then from the printer 3 Check the connection between the option and the printer IVIAKE SURE THE OPTION IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY Print a menu settings page and check to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list If the option is not listed then reinstall it For more information see the hardware setup documentation that came with the option or go to www lexmark com to view the option instruction sheet IVIAKE SURE THE OPTION IS SELECTED From the computer you are printing from select the option For more information see Updating available options in the printer driver on page 57 Paper tray problems Try one or more of the following MAKE SURE THE PAPER IS LOADED CORRECTLY 1 Open the paper tray 2 Check for paper jams or misfeeds 3 Make sure the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper 4 Make sure the paper tray closes properly RESET THE PRINTER Turn the printer off wait about 10 seconds and then turn the printer on Troubleshooting 300 IVIAKE SURE THE PAPER TRAY IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY If the paper tray is listed on the menu settings page but paper jams when it enters or exits the tray then i
168. d On through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes Onisthe factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off NPA Mode Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional Auto communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol On Notes Off Auto is the factory default setting Auto sets the printer to examine data determine the format and then processes it appropriately When set to On the printer performs NPA processing If the data is not in NPA format it is rejected as bad data When set to Off the printer does not perform NPA processing Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Understanding printer menus Menu item Serial Buffer Auto 3KB to maximum size allowed Disabled 172 Description Sets the size of the serial input buffer Notes Auto is the factory default setting Disabled turns off job buffering Any jobs already buffered on the disk are printed before normal processing is resumed The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1 KB increments The maximum size allowed dep
169. d applies a color conversion table that produces brighter more saturated sRGB Display colors Display True Black Display True Black applies a color conversion table that uses only black toner for sRGB Vivid neutral gray colors off RGB Graphics Vivid sRGB Display Display True Black sRGB Vivid off e Off turns off color conversion Understanding printer menus 229 5 Menu item Description Manual Color Customizes the CMYK color conversions CMYK Image Notes US CMYK Euro CMYK US CMYK is the US factory default setting US CMYK applies a color conversion Vivid CMYK table that tries to produce output that matches SWOP color output Off Euro CMYK is the international factory default setting Euro CMYK applies a color CMYK Text conversion table that tries to produce output that matches EuroScale color output US CMYK Bo i Vivid CMYK increases color saturation for the US CMYK color conversion table Euro CMYK Vivid CMYK Off turns off color conversion Off CMYK Graphics US CMYK Euro CMYK Vivid CMYK Off Spot Color Replacement Allows users to create and save custom spot colors with corresponding CMYK values Color Adjust Initiates a recalibration of color conversion tables and allows the printer to make adjustments for color variations in output Notes Adjusting color starts when the menu is selected Adj usting appears on the display until the process is finished Color variations in output s
170. d electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the system board For more information see Accessing the system board on page 35 2 Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the system board leaving the cable attached to the printer hard disk To unplug the cable squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before pulling the cable out Additional printer setup 52 3 Remove the screws while holding the printer hard disk in place and then remove the printer hard disk 4 Set the printer hard disk aside 5 Reattach the system board cover Order of installation A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high capacity input tray a duplex unit and an input option or more than one input option If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after
171. d images to your computer Convert scanned images to text Preview the scanned image and adjust the brightness and contrast Make larger scans without losing detail Scan two sided documents Using the ScanBack Utility You can use the Lexmark ScanBack Utility to create scan to PC profiles The ScanBack Utility can be downloaded from the Lexmark Web site on http support lexmark com 1 Set up a scan to PC profile a Launch the ScanBack Utility b Select the printer If no printers are listed then contact your system support person or click Setup to manually search for an IP address or host name Scanning to a computer or flash drive 143 c Follow the instructions on your computer screen to define the type of document being scanned and what kind of output you want to create d Select any of the following e Show MFP Instructions View or print the instructions Create Shortcut Save this group of settings to use again e Click Finish A dialog box appears with your scan profile information and the status of the received images 2 Scan original documents a Load all pages in the ADF or on the scanner glass b From the printer control panel navigate to Scan Email Profiles select your scan profile Submit Note The output file is saved in a directory or launched in the application you specified Understanding scan profile options Original Size This option sets the size of the documents you are g
172. d used to apply the settings to one or more additional printers Exporting a configuration 1 From the Embedded Web Server click Settings or Configuration 2 Click Device Solutions gt Solutions eSF or click Embedded Solutions 3 From Installed Solutions click the name of the application you want to configure 4 Click Configure gt Export 5 Follow the instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file and then enter a unique file name or use the default name Note If a JVM Out of Memory error occurs then repeat the export until the configuration file is saved Importing a configuration 1 From the Embedded Web Server click Settings or Configuration 2 Click Device Solutions gt Solutions eSF or click Embedded Solutions 3 From Installed Solutions click the name of the application you want to configure 4 Click Configure gt Import 5 Browse to the saved configuration file and then load or preview it Note If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears then refresh the browser and then click Apply Additional printer setup 33 Additional printer setup Installing internal options CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as we
173. de The following are the statuses of the indicator light and the Sleep button Entering or waking from Sleep Mode The indicator light is illuminated solid green Sleep button is unilluminated e Operating in Sleep Mode The indicator light is illuminated solid green Sleep button is illuminated solid amber Entering or waking from Hibernate Mode The indicator light is illuminated solid green Sleep button is illuminated blinking amber Operating in Hibernate Mode The indicator light is unilluminated Sleep button is blinking amber in pulsing pattern 4 Keypad Lets you enter numbers letters or symbols on the display 5 Submit Lets you submit changes made in the printer settings 6 Stop Cancel Stops all printer activity Note A list of option is displayed once Stopped appears on the display 7 Home Lets you navigate back to the home screen 8 Card reader Limits the use of certain printer functions to authenticated users Note The card reader may not be available on all printer models 9 USB port Lets you insert a USB flash drive to send data or to save scanned images Understanding the home screen 24 Understanding the home screen Understanding the home screen When the printer is turned on the display shows a basic screen referred to as the home screen Touch the home screen buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying faxing or scanning to open the menu Screen or to respond to messages Note Yo
174. default setting Negative Image Creates a negative image of the original document off Note Off is the factory default setting On Shadow Detail Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a fax 4 to 4 Note 0 is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus z 200 Menu item Description ADF Skew Fix Specifies whether or not to fix slight skew on the scanned image Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Scan edge to edge Specifies if the original document is scanned edge to edge prior to faxing Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of a fax 0 5 Note 3 is the factory default setting Temperature Enables the user to specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer Ato 4 output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default Enable Color Fax Scans Off by default On by default Never use Always use Enables color faxing Note Off by default is the factory default setting Auto Convert Color Faxes to Mono Faxes On Off Converts all outgoing faxes to black and white Note On is the factory default setting Fax Receive Settings Menu item Enable Fax Receive On Off Description Allows fax jobs to be received by the printer Note On is the factory default setting Rings to Answer 1 25 Specifies the number of rings before answering an inco
175. dia such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Advanced Options gt Separator Sheets Note Collate must be set to On for the separator sheets to be placed between copies If Collate is set to Off then the separator sheets are added to the end of the print job 4 Select one of the following Between Copies Between Jobs Copying 108 Between Pages None 5 Touch v and then Copy It Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet In order to save paper you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple page document onto a single sheet of paper Notes The Paper Size must be set to Letter Legal A4 or JIS B5 e The Copy Size must be set to 100 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy Advanced Options Paper Saver select desired output ZS gt Copy It Creating a custom copy job job build The custom copy job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents int
176. displayed on a computer monitor Black toner usage is optimized for printing photographs Display True Black Produces an output that approximates the colors displayed on a computer monitor Uses only blacktonerto create all levels of neutral gray sRGB Vivid Provides an increased color saturation for the SRGB Display color correction Black usage is optimized for printing business graphics Off No color correction is implemented CMYK Image US CMYK Applies color correction to approximate the SWOP CMYK Text Specifications for Web Offset Publishing color output CMYK Graphics Euro CMYK Applies color correction to approximated EuroScale color output e Vivid CMYK Increases the color saturation of the US CMYK color correction setting Off No color correction is implemented Troubleshooting 317 How can match a particular color such as a corporate logo From the printer Quality menu nine types of Color Samples sets are available These are also available from the Color Samples page of the Embedded Web Server Selecting any sample set generates a multiple page printout consisting of hundreds of colored boxes Either a CMYK or RGB combination is located on each box depending on the table selected The observed color of each box is obtained by passing the CMYK or RGB combination labeled on the box through the selected color conversion table By examining Color Samples sets a user can identify t
177. document is a photo from film Magazine is used when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper is used when the original document is from a newspaper Press is used when the original document was printed using a printing press Other is used when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Color Specifies whether a job prints in grayscale or color Color Note Color is the factory default setting Gray Understanding printer menus z 212 Menu item Description Resolution Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned 150 Note 150 dpi is the factory default setting 200 300 400 600 75 Darkness Lightens or darkens the output 1 9 Note 5 is the factory default setting Orientation Specifies the orientation of the scanned image Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Original Size Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned Letter Notes Legal Executive A4is the international factory default setting Folio Letter is the US factory default setting Statement Universal 4x6in 3x5 in Business Card Custom Scan Size x A4 AS Oficio Mexico A6 JIS B4 JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes Sides Duplex Off Long edge Short edge Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page Notes e Off is the factory default setting Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the p
178. e Some modes may not apply to your product a 1 meter average sound pressure dBA Printing 53 dBA Ready 35 dBA Values are subject to change See www lexmark com for current values Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE directive The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European Union We encourage the recycling of our products If you have further questions about recycling options visit the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com for your local sales office phone number Static sensitivity notice Notices 323 This symbol identifies static sensitive parts Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the metal frame of the printer ENERGY STAR Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start up screen is certified to comply with Environmental Protection Agency EPA ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark gt tft ENERGY STAR Temperature information Ambient temperature 15 6 to 32 2 C 60 to 90 F Shipping and storage temperature 40 to 40 C 104 F Laser notice This product contains a Class 1 laser producing invisible laser radiation The printer is certified in the U S to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Subchapter J for Class 1 laser products and elsewhere is certified as a Class laser prod
179. e all pages from the ADF 2 Turn the printer off 3 Wait for 15 seconds and then turn the printer on Note If turning the printer off and then on again does not clear the message then touch Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen and then contact your system support person Place the document in the ADF and then adjust the paper guides From the home screen touch Copy or use the keypad to enter the number of copies Change the copy settings as needed nn O Ui A Touch Copy It Troubleshooting 286 1565 Emulation error load emulation option The printer automatically clears the message in 30 seconds and then disables the download emulator on the firmware card To fix this download the correct download emulator version from the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com Solving printing problems Multiple language PDF files do not print The PDF files may contain unavailable fonts 1 Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat 2 Click the printer icon gt Advanced gt Print as image gt OK gt OK Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds The printer self test failed Turn the printer off wait about 10 seconds and then turn the printer on If Ready does not appear then turn the printer off and contact Customer Support Error message about reading USB drive appears Make sure the flash drive is supported Print jobs do not print Try one or more of the following
180. e list of publications click the Networking Guide link Installingthe printer using Guided or Advanced wireless setup Connecting the printer to an Ethernet or a wireless network Troubleshooting printer connection problems M y Learning about the printer 19 What are you looking for Find it here Help using the printer software Windows or Mac Help Opena printer software program or application and then click Help Click 2 to view context sensitive information Notes The Help installs automatically with the printer software The printer software is located in the printer Program folder or on the desktop depending on your operating system Latest supplemental information updates and technical support Lexmark Support Web site e Documentation http support lexmark com Note Select your country or region and then select your product to view the appropriate support site Driver downloads Live chat support Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for your country or region can be found on the Support Web Telephone support site or on the printed warranty that came with your printer E mail support Record the following information located on the store receipt and at the back of the printer and have it ready when you contact support so they may serve you faster Machine Type number Serial number Date purchased Store where purchased Warranty inform
181. e paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Letterhead Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Letterhead as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Preprinted Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Preprinted as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Colored Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Colored as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Light Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Light as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Heavy Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Heavy as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Rough Cotton Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Rough or Cotton as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Notes Duplex sets the printer default to 2 sided printing for every print job unless 1 sided printing is selected from Print Properties f Duplex is selected then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit including 1 sided print jobs S Understanding printer menus 157
182. e print jobs 2 Firmly shake the cartridge side to side and front to back several times to redistribute the toner 3 Reinsert the print cartridge Note If print quality does not improve replace the print cartridge of the color that is giving a shadow If the problem continues the printer may need to be serviced For more information contact customer support Gray background on prints Troubleshooting CHECK THE BACKGROUND DARKNESS OR REMOVAL SETTING Try one or more of the following Adjust the darkness to a lighter setting ncrease the background removal setting IVIAKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN OR DEFECTIVE PRINT CARTRIDGE Replace the worn or defective print cartridge Incorrect margins These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Size setting 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Light colored line white line or incorrectly colored line appears on prints D gt D gt D UJ UJ UJ Try one or more of the following 305 Troubleshooting 306 IVIAKE SURE THERE I
183. e printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the system board For more information see Accessing the system board on page 35 2 Unpack the ISP and plastic tee Note Avoid touching the components on the card 3 Locate the appropriate connector on the system board 4 Remove the printer hard disk For more information see Removing a printer hard disk on page 51 Additional printer setup 43 5 Remove the metal cover from the ISP opening 6 Align the posts of the plastic tee to the holes on the system board and press down until the tee clicks into place Be sure each post of the tee has latched completely and the tee is seated firmly on the system board Additional printer setup 44 7 Install the ISP on the plastic tee Angle the ISP over the plastic tee and then slant it toward the plastic tee so that any overhanging connectors will pass through the ISP opening in the system board cage 8 Lower the ISP toward the plastic tee until the ISP is seated between the guides of the plastic tee Additional printer setup 45 9 Insert the long thumbscrew and turn it clockwise enough to hold the ISP in place but do not yet tighten the thumbscrew OPOPOHN
184. e replaced There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced Do not recharge disassemble or incinerate a lithium battery Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions and local regulations CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Before moving the printer follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage Turn the printer off using the power switch and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it Lift the printer off the optional drawer and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same time Note Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer s authorized replacement A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce risk of fire use only the telecommunications RJ 11 cord provided with this product or a UL Listed 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product to the public switched telephone network CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system boa
185. e serial port if Serial Protocol is set to XON XOFF Understanding printer menus z 173 Menu item Description Baud Specifies the rate at which data can be received through the serial port 9600 Notes 19200 38400 9600 is the factory default setting 57600 138200 172800 230400 and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in the 115200 Standard Serial menu These settings do not appear in the Serial Option 1 138200 Serial Option 2 or Serial Option 3 menus 172800 230400 345600 1200 2400 4800 Data Bits Specifies the number of data bits sent in each transmission frame 8 Note 8 is the factory default setting 7 Parity Sets the parity for serial input and output data frames None Note None is the factory default setting Ignore Even Odd Honor DSR Determines whether the printer uses the DSR Signal off Notes On Offis the factory default setting DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables The serial port uses DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by electrical noise in the serial cable The electrical noise can cause stray characters to print Set this to On to prevent stray characters from printing SMTP Setup menu Menu item Primary SMTP Gateway Description Specifies SMTP server gateway and port information Primary SMTP Gateway Port Note 25 is the default SMTP gateway port Secondary SMTP Gateway Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
186. e t t ecd ee Si dece og ee Lett dedita aa 282 58 Too many flash options installed esses eene nen nnne nnn tenent nennen nnns 282 58 Too many trays attached neo iia 282 58 Input config error ecce dte ass 283 59 Incompatible output bin x cee sessccccsssseccecessessseeeccesessusecescessusesecssusesesesceesseeesesesuasseeeeeseseseaseeeseesesaeas 283 61 Remove defective disk r a aa a ae a a aaa a aaa ae sene nee esses nnn 283 Contents 13 62 DIsk f ll i Mas oe Bete ri tias 283 3006 Fuser near life Warning ite Rede et ied te ago d ph 283 80oocFuser life Wafning sin tiit etn aide llt estat deb iu a eate tear 283 80 xx Replace f ser n endete te oe de Sh c E ence d ct cde P tion 284 BORK F ser MISSING 2 A A ee deat vacet vena Vac de UE a ine ma I UO cU da ao iere Oe Tao new 284 823x Replace waste tonert bottle guo daa 284 82 xx Waste toner bottle MISSING eec aaa 284 82 xx Waste toner bottle nearly full eese ennnn nnne neri nene ene nenn sene n nnns 284 83x Replace transfer module ii b last ialao talca dal 284 83 xx Transfer module life Warning atii eroien aaa Ea aet aE Earr a iaaea 284 83 xx Transfer module missing ccccsesscccccssssccecessessseeeceesessusecesccseseecesessseeeseseessseeesesesussseeecessueseaueeesessenaeas 284 88 xx color cartridge nearly OW a a a a riadas 284 88 xXX color cartridge lOW ase ode dt aaa ot a E a e a deese ue a ER ace AT
187. e telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of this equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service If you experience trouble with this equipment for repair or warranty information contact Lexmark International Inc at www lexmark com or your Lexmark representative If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved This equipment contains no user serviceable parts For repair and warranty information contact Lexmark International Inc See the previous paragraph for contact information Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line ensure the installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment consult your telephone company or a qualified installer Telephone companies report that electrical surges typically lightning tra
188. e touch screen 128 setting the date and time 126 setting the fax number or station number 126 setting the outgoing fax name or station name 126 viewing a fax log 131 FCC notices 321 325 329 features Scan Center 142 fiber optic network setup 62 finding more information about the printer 18 finisher finishing features 90 supported paper sizes 90 finisher features 90 Finishing menu 224 firmware card installing 40 flash drive printing from 94 Flash Drive menu 215 flash drives supported file types 96 flash memory card installing 40 troubleshooting 300 font sample list printing 100 Forms and Favorites 30 forwarding faxes 134 FTP scanning using address book 137 FTP address creating shortcuts using the touch screen 138 FTP screen advanced options 140 options 138 139 140 FTP Settings menu 211 G General Settings menu 179 Green settings Eco Mode 69 Quiet Mode 69 green settings Hibernate Mode 71 H held jobs 98 printing from a Macintosh computer 99 printing from Windows 99 Help menu 235 Hibernate Mode using 71 hiding icons on the home screen 29 holding faxes 134 home screen applications 29 hiding icons 29 showing icons 29 home screen applications using 29 home screen buttons and icons description 24 HTML menu 234 Image menu 235 importing a configuration using the Embedded Web Server 32 importing a configuration using the Embedded Web Server 32 initial fax setup 122 using the Embedded Web Server 1
189. e waste toner bottle appears replace the waste toner bottle Note Waste toner bottle reuse is not recommended Part number Waste toner bottle C792X77G Ordering staple cartridges When Staples Lowor Staples Empty appears order the specified staple cartridge For more information see the illustrations inside the stapler door Part number Staple Cartridges 3 pack 25A0013 Since a pack contains 5 000 staples a 3 pack contains 15 000 staples Ordering an ADF kit Order an ADF kit if you experience problems with paper double feeding or paper failing to feed through the ADF Part number ADF kit 40X7220 Ordering a cleaning kit Use the wet and dry wipes from the cleaning kit to clean the touch screen Part number Cleaning kit wet and dry wipes 40X0392 Maintaining the printer 248 Replacing supplies Replacing a print cartridge 1 Open the front door 3 Place the old cartridge in the replacement cartridge shipping box and then attach the return label to the box for shipping Maintaining the printer 249 4 Unpack a new print cartridge Warning Potential Damage Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs o 5 Shake the new cartridge front to back and side to side to evenly distribute the toner Maintaining the printer 250 6 Remove the red packing strip from the new cartrid
190. ed then the LAN drop may not be active or the network cable may be malfunctioning Consult a system support person for a solution and then print another network setup page Setting up the printer software Installing the printer software Note If you installed the printer software on this computer before but need to reinstall the software then uninstall the current software first For Windows users 1 Close all open software programs 2 Insert the installation software CD If the installation dialog screen does not appear after a minute then launch the CD manually a Click e or click Start and then click Run b Inthe Start Search or Run box type D Nsetup exe where Dis the letter of your CD or DVD drive C Press Enter or click OK 3 Click Install and then follow the instructions on the computer screen For Macintosh users 1 Close all open applications 2 Insert the installation software CD If the installation dialog does not appear after a minute then click the CD icon on the desktop 3 Double click the software installer package and then follow the instructions on the computer screen Using the Internet 1 Go to the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com 2 Navigate to SUPPORT amp DOWNLOADS gt select your printer gt select your operating system 3 Download the driver and install the printer software Note Updated printer software may be available at http support lexmark com Additional printer setup 57 U
191. edder output than the default Sample Copy Creates a sample copy of the original document Off Note Off is the factory default setting On V m Fax Settings menu Fax Mode Analog Fax Setup menu Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job by way of a telephone line General Fax Settings Menu item Description Fax Name or Station Name Specifies the name of the fax in the printer Fax Number or Station Number Specifies a number associated with the fax Station ID Specifies how the fax is identified Fax Name or Station Name Fax Number or Station Number Understanding printer menus 195 Menu item Description Enable Manual Fax Sets the printer to fax manually only which requires a line splitter and a telephone Off handset On Notes Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax number Touch 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function Memory Use Defines the allocation of non volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs Equal Notes Mostly sent All send Equal is the factory default setting Equal splits the memory for sending and receiving fax jobs into equal amounts All receive 8 J q Mostly receive Mostly sent specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs All send specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs All receive specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs Mostly receive specifie
192. een make sure no scaling is being selected When the text is light or disappearing From the Copy screen navigate to Content gt Text gt ZS gt select the appropriate source for the original document being copied gt ZS From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options Advanced Imaging Sharpness increase the current setting From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options Advanced Imaging Background removal and then reduce the current setting From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options Advanced Imaging Contrast increase the current setting From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options Advanced Imaging Shadow detail reduce the current setting When the output appears washed out or overexposed Onthe Copy screen make sure the Content Type and Source settings are appropriate for the document being scanned From the Copy screen adjust the Darkness setting From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options Advanced Imaging Shadow detail reduce the current setting From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options gt Advanced Imaging gt Background removal gt reduce the current setting Partial document or photo copies These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Troubleshooting 292 CHECK THE PAPER
193. efault settings for all settings associated with Eco Mode This setting supports the performance specifications of your printer Energy Reduce energy use especially when the printer is idle The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity When the printer enters Sleep mode the printer control panel display and the standard exit bin lights are turned off f scanning is supported then the scanner lamps are activated only when a scan job is started Energy Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy mode and Paper mode Paper Enable the automatic duplex feature Turn off print log features Reducing printer noise To select a Quiet Mode setting using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings General Settings Quiet Mode select a setting Submit Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 70 Choose To Off Use factory default settings This setting supports the Note Selecting Photo from the driver may disable Quiet performance specifications of your printer Mode and provide better print quality and full speed printing
194. ends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and network buffers Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Job Buffering Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing off Notes On Auto e Offis the factory default setting The printer does not buffer print jobs on the printer hard disk On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Protocol Selects the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port DTR Notes DTR DSR XON XOFF DTRis the factory default setting XON XOFF DTR DTR DSR is a hardware handshaking setting XONXOFF DTRDSR XON XOFF is a software handshaking setting XON XOFF DTR and XON XOFF DTR DSR are combined hardware and software handshaking settings Robust XON Determines whether the printer communicates availability to the computer off Notes On Offis the factory default setting This menu item applies only to th
195. er South Africa telecommunications notice This modem must be used in conjunction with an approved surge protection device when connected to the PSTN Notices 328 Using this product in Switzerland This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter Lexmark part number 14B5109 or 80D1877 to be installed on any line which receives metering pulses in Switzerland The Lexmark filter must be used as metering pulses are present on all analog telephone lines in Switzerland Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse Cet appareil n cessite l utilisation d un filtre de tonalit de facturation suisse n9 de r f rence Lexmark 14B5109 ou 80D1877 devant tre install sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse Ce filtre doit tre utilis pour toute installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes t l phoniques suisses Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz F r dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Z hlzeichen bertragung Lexmark Teilenummer 14B5109 oder 80D1877 f r jede Leitung installiert werden ber die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte bertragen werden Die Verwendung des Lexmark Filters ist obligatorisch da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind Uso del prodotto in Svizzera Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero codice Lexmark 14B5109 o 80D1877 da installare su tutte le linee che ricevono impulsi remoti in
196. er When Copy to is set to Auto Size Match each copy matches the paper size of the original document If a matching paper size is not in one of the trays then Paper size not found appears and prompts to load a paper in a tray or multipurpose feeder Copies This option allows you to set the number of copies to be printed Copying 111 Scale This option creates an image from your copy that is proportionally scaled anywhere between 25 and 400 Scale can also be set for you automatically When you want to copy from one size of paper to another such as from legal size to letter size paper setting the Copy from and Copy to paper sizes automatically changes the scale to keep all the original document information on your copy Touch the left arrow to decrease the value by 1 touch the right arrow to increase the value by 1 Hold your finger on an arrow to make a continuous increment change Hold your finger on an arrow for two seconds to cause the pace of the change to accelerate Darkness This option adjusts how light or dark your copies will turn out in relation to the original document Sides Duplex Use this option to select duplex settings You can print copies on one or two sides make two sided copies duplex of two sided original documents make two sided copies from one sided original documents or make one sided copies simplex from two sided original documents Collate This option keeps the pa
197. er Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer Inkjet Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer Photo Film Use when the original document is a photo from film Magazine Use when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper Use when the original document is from a newspaper Press Use when the original document was printed using a printing press Other Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Resolution This options increases how closely the scanner examines the document you want to fax If you are faxing a photo a drawing with fine lines or a document with very small text then increase the Resolution setting This will increase the amount of time required for the scan and will increase the quality of the fax output Standard Suitable for most documents Fine 200 dpi Recommended for documents with small print Super fine 300 dpi Recommended for original documents with fine detail Ultra fine 600 dpi Recommended for documents with pictures or photos Note Fine 200 dpi and Super fine 300 dpi is displayed when color printing is selected Faxing 133 Darkness This option adjusts how light or dark your faxes will turn out in relation to the original document Color This option enables or disables color in faxing Page Setup This option lets you change the Sides Duplex Orientation and Binding settings S
198. er Embedded Web Server Forward to Shortcut Lets you enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type Fax E mail FTP LDSS or eSF Block No Name Fax Off On Enables blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID specified Banned Fax List Enables the list of banned fax numbers stored in the printer Holding Faxes Held Fax Mode Off Always On Manual Scheduled Fax Holding Schedule Enables fax holding all of the time or according to a set schedule Note Off is the factory default setting Enable Color Fax Receive On Off Enables the device to receive fax in color Understanding printer menus Fax Log Settings Menu item Transmission Log Print log Do not print log Print only for error 202 Description Enables printing of a transmission log after each fax job Receive Error Log Print Never Print on Error Enables printing of a receive error log following a receive error Auto Print Logs On Off Enables automatic printing of fax logs Note Logs print after every 200 jobs Log Paper Source Tray x Manual Feeder Selects the source of the paper used for printing logs Logs Display Remote Fax Name or Remote Station Name Dialed Number Specifies whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name returned Enable Job Log On Off Enables access to the Fax Job log Enable Call Log On Off Enables
199. er format shows the font name font ID and storage location in the printer The font source abbreviation is R for Resident F for Flash K for Disk and D for Download Symbol Set Specifies the symbol set for each font name 10U PC 8 Notes 12U PC 850 10U PC 8 is the US factory default setting 12U PC 850 is the international factory default setting Asymbol set is a set of alphabetical and numeric characters punctuation and special symbols Symbol sets support the different languages or specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text Only the supported symbol sets are shown PCL Emulation Settings Point Size 1 00 1008 00 Changes the point size for scalable typographic fonts Notes e 12 is the factory default setting Point Size refers to the height of the characters in the font One point equals approximately 1 72 of an inch e Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0 25 point increments PCL Emulation Settings Pitch 0 08 100 Specifies the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts Notes 10 is the factory default setting Pitch refers to the number of fixed space characters per inch cpi Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0 01 cpi increments For non scalable monospaced fonts the pitch appears on the display but cannot be changed PCL Emulation Settings Orientation Portrait Landscape Specifies the orientation of text and graphics on a page Notes Portrait is the
200. er glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides ITIN 3 Press and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad 4 Touch Fax It Sending a fax using the address book The address book enables you to search for bookmarks and network directory servers Note If the address book feature is not enabled then contact your system support person 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax gt gt Browse shortcuts 4 Using the virtual keyboard type the name or part of the name of the person whose fax number you want to find Note Do not attempt to search for multiple names at the same time 5 Touch Done gt Fax It Faxing 130 Customizing fax settings Changing the fax resolution Settings range from Standard fastest speed to Ultra Fine slowest speed best quality 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If y
201. er glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy Copying 106 4 From the Sides Duplex area touch the button for your preferred duplexing method The first number represents sides of the original documents the second number represents sides of the copy For example select 1 sided to 2 sided if you have 1 sided original documents and you want 2 sided copies 5 Touch v and then Copy It Reducing or enlarging copies Copies can be reduced to 25 of the original document size or enlarged to 400 of the original document size The factory default setting for Scale is Auto If you leave Scale set to Auto the content of your original document will be scaled to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying To reduce or enlarge a copy 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy 4 From the Scale area touch the arrows to enlarge or reduce your copies
202. er is used when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Color Specifies whether or not copies are printed in color On Note On is the factory default setting Off Allow color copies Lets you enable or disable color in copying On Notes Off Onisthe factory default setting Setting this to Off will hide all color specific menus This setting overrides the Color setting S y Understanding printer menus Menu item Sides Duplex 1 sided to 1 sided 1 sided to 2 sided 2 sided to 1 sided 2 sided to 2 sided 189 Description Specifies whether an original document is duplex two sided or simplex one sided and then specifies whether the copy should be duplex or simplex Notes 1 sided to 1 sided The original page has printing on one side and the copied page will also have printing on one side 1 sided to 2 sided The original page has printing on one side while the copied page will have printing on both sides For example if the original document is six sheets the copy is three sheets with printing on both sides e 2 sided to 1 sided The original page has printing on both sides while the copied page will have printing on only one side For example if the original document is three sheets with an image on each side of each sheet then the copy is six sheets with only one image on one side of each sheet 2sided to 2 sided The original page has printing on both sides a
203. erver and then enter the Settings menu Note If you do not have a TCP IP environment then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup information Using the printer control panel for fax setup When the printer is turned on for the first time or if the printer has been off for an extended time a series of start up screens appear If the printer has fax capabilities then the following screens appear Fax Name or Station Name Fax Number or Station Number 1 When Fax Name or Station Name appears enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes 2 After entering the Fax Name or Station Name touch Submit 3 When Fax Number or Station Number appears enter the printer fax number 4 After entering the Fax Number or Station Number touch Submit Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings Fax Settings Analog Fax Setup 3 In the Fax Name or Station Name field enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes 4 In the Fax Number or Station Number field enter the printer fax number 5 Click Submit Faxing 123 Choosing a fax connection Notes The pri
204. ervices Scan application lets you scan documents at the printer and then send the scanned image to your computer WS Scan is a Microsoft application that is similar to Scan to Network but has the capability of sending the scanned document to a Windows based application To learn more about WS Scan refer to the Microsoft documentation Note The icon appears on the printer home screen only when there is a Windows 7 or Windows Vista client currently registered with the printer Remote Operator Panel This application shows the printer control panel on your computer screen and lets you interact with the printer control panel even when you are not physically near the printer From your computer screen you can view the printer status release held print jobs create bookmarks and do other print related tasks you might normally do while standing at the printer To activate Remote Operator Panel do the following 1 From the Embedded Web Server click Settings Device Solutions Solutions eSF Remote Operator Panel 2 Select the Enabled check box and then customize the settings 3 Click Apply Touse Remote Operator Panel from the Embedded Web Server click Applications Remote Operator Panel Launch VNC Applet Setting up and using the home screen applications 32 Exporting and importing a configuration using the Embedded Web Server You can export configuration settings into a text file that can then be imported an
205. es not operate correctly ccooooococcncnonooonnnnnncanonnnnncnnnnnnnnncnnnonnonnnnncnnnnnonnnnanononnncnnns 301 Memory Cards ine hc eee diste A eed eee eee 301 USB parallel interface card does not operate correctly ccccccsscessccessccesecssseceseccssecsesecsseccsseceesessseeecseeeses 301 Solving paper feed problems err iere bete p PER RR RE Feo pa ER Een asa Te un Cr IRE SPERARE Ye ead 302 Paper frequently jams rte tee tee eem debet deese edle ea eye a 302 Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared ccccnoococcnonooonnnononononnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnno nn nnnnnnnnnn nn nennen 302 Jammed pages are not reprinted tete ete eds elected pce Prato en aste ida ais 302 Solving print quality problems eese enne nnnnnnnn nnne nnne en enn nee neret nnns sss nna sa sanis 303 Characters have jagged or uneven edges csccccccsssssseececesssssceeescessaeaueceseeseeeescseseecesesssssuseesseseseaeeaseseesenaaaes 303 Clipped Images Renee eet ete edis qute etia eter ne iet 303 Fine horizontal lines appear on color pages ccesseseccessesseccecsesnsnsecesceesseceeeescessuesesscseseeeeseesaeeesesseeesenaeeeeens 303 Shadow images appear on prints niece e reete pes eode e ect dte receta dea eme Idle ierat 304 Gray background on Piti dd didas 304 Inc rrectimarglhis s eicit ad REI 305 Light colored line white line or incorrectly colored line appears on prints o cccccnnocononcnonanonnnnnnnanana
206. escription Bond Texture Rough Smooth Normal Specifies the relative texture of the bond paper loaded Note Rough is the factory default setting Envelope Texture Normal Rough Smooth Specifies the relative texture of the envelopes loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Rough Envelope Texture Rough Specifies the relative texture of the envelopes loaded Note Rough is the factory default setting Letterhead Texture Normal Rough Smooth Specifies the relative texture of the letterhead loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Preprinted Texture Normal Rough Smooth Specifies the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Colored Texture Specifies the relative texture of the colored paper loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Rough Smooth Light Texture Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Rough Smooth Heavy Texture Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Rough Smooth Rough Cotton Texture Specifies the relative texture of the cotton paper loaded Rough Note Rough is the factory default setting Custom x Texture Specifies the relative texture of the custom paper loaded Normal Notes Rough Smooth Normal is the factory default setting Set
207. estrict you from accessing certain Web sites including the Embedded Web Server For more information contact your system support person Contacting customer support When you call customer support describe the problem you are experiencing the message on the display and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution You need to know your printer model type and serial number For more information see the label on the inside top front cover of the printer The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page In the U S or Canada call 1 800 539 6275 For other countries or regions visit the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Notices 319 Notices Product information Product name Lexmark X792de X792dte X792dtfe X792dtpe X792dtme X792dtse Machine type 7562 4917 Model s 432 436 dn1 dn2 gd1 gd2 dt1 dt2 gt1 gt2 df1 df2 gf1 gf2 d01 d02 g01 g02 t01 t02 g91 g92 f01 f02 g81 g82 Edition notice September 2011 The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL INC PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this stateme
208. f On Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 211 FTP Settings menu Menu item Description Format Specifies the format of the FTP file PDF pdf Note PDF pdf is the factory default setting Secure PDF pdf TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps PDF Version Sets the version level of the PDF file for FTP 1 5 Note 1 5 is the factory default setting 1 6 A 1a 1 2 1 3 1 4 Content Type Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to FTP Text Notes Graphics Text Photo Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Photo is used when the original Photo document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Text is used when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphics is used when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Photo is used when the document being scanned is mostly a photo or an image Content Source Specifies how content will be produced Color Laser Notes Inkjet Magazine Color Laser is the factory default setting Color Laser is used when the original prets document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Laser dun der kd the original document was printed using a ack white laser printer Photo Film nae p o m Newspaper Inkjet is used when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer Other Photo Film is used when the original
209. f colors in the output Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Specifies which color to drop during copies and how much to increase or decrease the dropout Notes None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Understanding printer menus 194 Menu item Description Contrast Specifies the contrast used for the copy job Best for content Note Best for content is the factory default setting 0 5 Mirror Image Creates a mirror image of the original document Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Negative Image Creates a negative image of the original document Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Shadow Detail Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy 4 to 4 Note 0 is the factory default setting ADF Skew Fix Lets you fix slight skew on the scanned image Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Scan edge to edge Specifies if the original document is scanned edge to edge Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Sharpness Adjusts the amount of sharpness of a copy 1 5 Note 3 is the factory default setting Temperature Enables the user to specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer Ato4 output than the default while warm values generate a r
210. f the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find atray with the correct paper type and size it feeds from the default paper source Cancel the print job Load src with type size Try one or more of the following Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder Touch Paper loaded continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find atray with the correct paper type and size it feeds from the default paper source Cancel the print job Troubleshooting 275 Load Manual Feeder with custom type name Try one or more of the following Load the specified paper in the manual feeder e Touch Prompt each page paper loaded or Do not prompt paperloadedto clear the message and continue printing Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray Cancel the print job Load Manual Feeder with custom string Try one or more of the following Load the specified paper in the manual feeder e Touch Prompt each page paper loaded or Do not prompt paperloaded to clear the message and continue printing Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray Cancel the print job Load Manual Feeder with paper size Try one or more of the following Load the specified paper in the manual feede
211. factory default setting Portrait prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page PCL Emulation Settings Lines per Page 1 255 Specifies the number of lines that print on each page Notes 60 is the US factory default setting 64 is the international default setting The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the Lines per Page Paper Size and Orientation settings Select the desired Paper Size and Orientation before setting Lines per Page Understanding printer menus 233 a Menu item Description PCL Emulation Settings Sets the printer to print on A4 size paper A4 Width Notes 198 mm 203 mm 198 mm is the factory default setting The 203 mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of eighty 10 pitch characters PCL Emulation Settings Specifies whetherthe printer automatically performs a carriage return CR after Auto CR after LF a line feed LF control command Off Note Off is the factory default setting On PCL Emulation Settings Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a line feed LF after a Auto LF after CR carriage return CR control command Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Tray Renumber Configures the printer to work with printer software or programs that use Assign MP Feeder different source assignments for trays drawers
212. factory default setting Print Collate Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies Notes On is the factory default setting On stacks the print job in sequence Separator Sheets Off Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages Specifies whether blank separator sheets are inserted Notes Offis the factory default setting Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to On If Collate is set to Off a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages such as after all page 1 s and after all page 2 s Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document Understanding printer menus Menu item Separator Source Tray x Manual Feeder 225 Description Specifies the paper source for separator sheets Notes Tray 1 standard tray is the factory default setting From the Paper menu Configure MP must be set to Cassette for Manual Feeder to appear as a menu setting Paper Saver Off 2 Up 3 Up 4 Up 6 Up 9 Up 12 Up 16 Up Specifies that multiple page images be printed on one side of a paper Notes e Off is the factory default setting The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side Paper Saver
213. faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message Complete the Analog Fax Setup If the message appears again contact your system support person Fax Station Number not set up The Fax Station Number has not been entered Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message Complete the Analog Fax Setup If the message appears again contact your system support person Troubleshooting 273 Install bin x Try one or more of the following Install the specified bin 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Install the specified bin 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Cancel the print job Install Tray x Try one or more of the following nstall the specified tray 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Install the specified tray 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Cancel the print job Insert the hole punch box Insert the hole punch box into the finisher and then touch Continue to clear the message Insert Tray x Insert the specified tray into the printer Insert staple cartridge Try one or more of the following nsert a staple cartridge
214. film Magazine Use when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper Use when the original document is from a newspaper Press Use when the original document was printed using a printing press Other Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Darkness This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document Page Setup This option lets you change the Sides Duplex Orientation and Binding Sides Duplex Use this to specify if the original document is simplex printed on one page or duplex printed on both sides This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e mail Orientation Use this to specify the orientation of the original document and then change Sides and Binding to match the orientation Binding Use this to specify if the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge of the page Scan Preview This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e mail When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Advanced Options Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings ADF Skew Fix Use this to correct slight skew in the scanned image Advanced Imaging Use this to change or adjust Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast
215. fore buying large quantities Feed transparencies from the multipurpose feeder only From the Paper menu set the MP Feeder Type to Transparency Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers Transparencies must be able to withstand temperatures of 230 C 446 F without melting discoloring offsetting or releasing hazardous emissions To prevent print quality problems avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies Before loading transparencies flex the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together We recommend Lexmark transparencies For ordering information see the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com Tips on using envelopes Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure that the envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 220 C 446 F without sealing wrinkling curling excessively or releasing hazardous emissions For best performance use envelopes made from 90 g m 24 Ib bond paper or 25 cotton All cotton envelopes must not exceed 70 g m 20 Ib bond weight Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages To optimize performance and minimize jams do not use envelopes that Have excessive curl or twist Are stuck together or damaged in any way Have windows holes perforations cutouts or embossing Have metal clasps string ties or f
216. from Macintosh 93 from Windows 93 menu settings page 55 network setup page 56 on letterhead 96 printing a directory list 100 printing a document 93 printing a font sample list 100 printing a menu settings page 55 printing a network setup page 56 printing confidential and other held jobs from a Macintosh computer 99 from Windows 99 printing from a flash drive 94 printing in black and white 93 printing on letterhead 96 publications where to find 18 Q Quality menu 226 Quiet Mode print quality troubleshooting 303 R Reattach bin x 276 Reattach bin x y 276 reattaching the system board cover 35 recycled paper using 68 86 recycling Lexmark packaging 73 Lexmark products 72 toner cartridges 73 WEEE statement 322 reducing a copy 106 reducing printer noise 69 Remote Operator Panel 31 Remove packaging material area name 277 Remove paper from all bins 277 Remove paper from bin x 277 Remove paper from standard output bin 277 removing printer hard disk 51 repeat print jobs 98 printing from a Macintosh computer 99 printing from Windows 99 repeating print defects 309 replacing a print cartridge 248 replacing the waste toner bottle 251 reports viewing 255 Reports menu 160 reserve print jobs 98 printing from a Macintosh computer 99 printing from Windows 99 resolution fax changing 130 Restore held jobs 277 restoring factory default settings 256 S safety information 16 17 saving paper 1
217. ft side of the tray Place letterheads facedown with the header on the right side of the tray for duplex printing Make sure the paper is below the maximum fill line located on the edge of the paper tray Overloading the tray can cause paper jams and possible printer damage 6 Insert the tray 7 From the printer control panel verify the Paper Size and Paper Type for the tray based on the paper you loaded Loading paper and specialty media 78 Loading the 2000 sheet high capacity feeder The high capacity feeder can hold up to 2 000 sheets of A4 letter or legal size paper 80 g m or 20 Ib CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each paper drawer or tray separately Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed 1 Pull the tray out 2 Adjust the width guide as necessary 3 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface Loading paper and specialty media 79 4 Load paper into the tray with the print side faceup Note Make sure the paper is below the maximum fill line located on the edge of the paper tray Overloading the tray can cause paper jams Notes Place pre punched paper with the holes toward the front of the tray Place letterheads faceup with the header on the left side of the tray Place letterheads facedown with the header on the right side of the tray for duplex pr
218. g the printer on a wireless network Prepare to configure the printer 1 Connect the power cable to the printer and then to a properly grounded electrical outlet and then turn the printer on 2 Locate the printer MAC address a From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Network Setup Page b Inthe Standard Network Card section look for UAA MAC Note You will need this information later Additional printer setup 61 Enter the printer information 1 Access the AirPort options In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences gt Network gt AirPort In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Internet Connect gt AirPort 2 From the Network Name pop up menu select print server yyyyyy where the y s are the last six digits of the MAC address located on the MAC address sheet 3 Open a Web browser 4 From the Bookmarks menu select Show or Show All Bookmarks 5 Under COLLECTIONS select Bonjour or Rendezvous and then double click the printer name Note The application referred to as Rendezvous in Mac OS X version 10 2 is now called Bonjour by Apple Inc 6 From the Embedded Web Server navigate to where the wireless settings information are stored Configure the printer for wireless access 1 Type the network name SSID in the appropriate field 2 Select Infrastructure as your Network Mode setting if you are using an acce
219. ge ZN 7 Insert the new cartridge into the printer and then push the green handle back in place Note Make sure the cartridge is fully pushed in 8 Close the front door Maintaining the printer 251 Replacing the waste toner bottle Replace the waste toner bottle when 82 xx Replace waste toner bottle appears The printer will not continue printing until the waste toner bottle is replaced 1 Remove the replacement waste toner bottle from its shipping box and then unpack it 2 Open the printer front door and then open tray 1 3 Pull the green tabs sideways and then grasp and pull the tabs with both hands to remove the waste toner bottle 4 Place the waste toner bottle in the recycling bag 5 Place the bag into the shipping box you removed the replacement part from Maintaining the printer 252 6 Peel the recycling label off and place it on the shipping box 7 Insert the new waste toner bottle into the printer 8 Close tray 1 and then close the front door Moving the printer Before moving the printer A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Before moving the printer follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage Turn the printer off using the power switch and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Disconnect all c
220. ges of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document The factory default setting for Collate is on the output pages of your copies will be ordered 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 If you want all the copies of each page to remain together turn Collate off and your copies will be ordered 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 Content This option lets you set the original document type and source Choose content type from Text Text Photo Photo or Graphics Text Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphics Use when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Text Photo Use when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Photo Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image Choose content source from Color Laser Black White Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press or Other Color Laser Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Laser Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer Inkjet Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer Photo Film Use when the original document is a photo from film Magazine Use when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper Use when the original document is from a newspaper Copying 112 Press Use when the original
221. he Finder navigate to Go gt Applications Double click Utilities gt Print Center or Printer Setup Utility Double click the printer icon From the printer window select the print job you want to cancel u bb Y N From the icon bar at the top of the window click the Delete icon Copying 102 Copying ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings Making copies Making a quick copy 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Adjust the paper guides when loading a document into the ADF Note Make sure the size of the original document and the copy paper size are the same Failure to set the proper size may result to a cropped image 3 From the printer control panel press to start copying Copying using the ADF 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Adjust the paper guides 3 From the home s
222. he box whose color is the closest to the desired color The color combination labeled on the box can then be used for modifying the color of the object in a software program For more information see the software program Help topics Manual color correction may be necessary to utilize the selected color conversion table for the particular object Selecting which Color Samples set to use for a particular color matching problem depends on the Color Correction setting being used Auto Off or Manual the type of object being printed text graphics or images and how the color of the object is specified in the software program RGB or CMYK combinations When the printer Color Correction setting is set to Off the color is based on the print job information and no color conversion is implemented Note The Color Samples pages are not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK combinations Additionally certain situations exist in which the software program or the computer operating system adjusts the RGB or CMYK combinations specified in the program through color management The resulting printed color may not be an exact match of the Color Samples pages What are detailed Color Samples and how do access them Detailed Color Samples sets are available only through the Embedded Web Server of a network printer A detailed Color Samples set contains a range of shades displayed as colored boxes that are similar to a use
223. he scanner unit open 3 Lower the scanner unit Poor copy quality These are some examples of poor copy quality Blank pages Checkerboard pattern Distorted graphics or pictures Missing characters Faded print Dark print Skewed lines Smudges Streaks Unexpected characters White lines in print Try one or more of the following CLEAR ANY ERROR MESSAGES Check the display and clear any error messages REPLACE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE When the print remains faded replace the toner or print cartridge CLEAN THE SCANNER GLASS The scanner glass may be dirty Clean the scanner glass with a clean lint free cloth dampened with water For more information see Cleaning the scanner glass on page 241 ADJUST THE TONER DARKNESS OF THE COPY Adjust the toner darkness from the Copy menus 290 Troubleshooting 291 IVIAKE SURE THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT IS SATISFACTORY Check the quality of the original document PLACE THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT PROPERLY Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner MAKE SURE TO USE THE APPROPRIATE COPY SETTINGS When patterns moir appear in the output Onthe Copy screen make sure the Content Type and Source settings are appropriate for the document being scanned From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options Advanced Imaging Sharpness lower the Sharpness setting Onthe Copy scr
224. held faxes released d From the Day s menu select the day you want the held faxes released 6 Click Add Forwarding a fax This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number e mail address FTP site or LDSS 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings 3 From the Fax Forwarding menu select one of the following Print Print and Forward Forward Faxing 135 4 From the Forward to menu select one of the following Fax E mail e FTP e LDSS eSF 5 In the Forward to Shortcut field enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded Note The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the Forward to menu 6 Click Submit Scanning to an FTP address 136 Scanning to an FTP address Scanner glass a ADF Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings M The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol FTP server Only one FTP address may be sent to the
225. hen click Add Note If the printer does not show up in the list then you may need to add it using the IP address For more information contact your system support person Additional printer setup 65 Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port When a new Lexmark Internal Solutions Port ISP is installed in the printer the printer configurations on computers that access the printer must be updated since the printer will be assigned a new IP address All computers that access the printer must be updated with this new IP address Notes fthe printer has a static IP address then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations e ifthe computers are configured to use network name that will stay the same instead of by IP address then you do not need to make any changes to your computer configurations If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for a wired connection then make sure the wired network is disconnected when you configure the printer to operate wirelessly If the wired connection remains connected then the wireless configuration will complete but the wireless ISP will not be active In the event that the printer was configured for a wireless ISP while still attached to a wired connection disconnect the wired connection turn the printer off and then turn the printer back on again This will enable the wireless ISP Only one network connectio
226. hly is the factory default setting Log Action at End of Frequency None E mail Current Log E mail amp Delete Current Log Post Current Log Post amp Delete Current Log Determines how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires Note None is the factory default setting Disk Near Full Level 1 99 Off Specifies the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Disk Near Full Action Note 5MB is the factory default setting Disk Near Full Action None E mail Current Log E mail amp Delete Current Log E mail amp Delete Oldest Log Post Current Log Post amp Delete Current Log Post amp Delete Oldest Log Delete Current Log Delete Oldest Log Delete All Logs Delete All But Current Determines how the printer responds when the printer hard disk is nearly full Notes None is the factory default setting The value defined in Disk Near Full Level determines when this action is triggered Disk Full Action None E mail amp Delete Current Log E mail amp Delete Oldest Log Post amp Delete Current Log Post amp Delete Oldest Log Delete Current Log Delete Oldest Log Delete All Logs Delete All But Current Determines how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum limit 100MB Note None is the factory default setting URL to Post Logs Determines where the printer posts job accounting logs Understanding printer menus 224 E ma
227. ick Run b Inthe Start Search or Run box type D Nsetup exe where Dis the letter of the CD or DVD drive C Press Enter or click OK 2 Click Install and then follow the instructions on the computer screen Note To configure the printer using a static IP address IPv6 or scripts select Advanced Options Administrator Tools 3 Select Ethernet connection and then click Continue 4 Attach the appropriate cable to the computer and to the printer when instructed to do so 5 Select the printer from the list and then click Continue Note If the configured printer does not appear on the list then click Modify Search 6 Follow the instructions on the computer screen For Macintosh users 1 Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer 2 Obtain the printer IP address You can a View the information on the printer control panel home screen or in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu b Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP IP section Note You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer 3 Install the printer drivers and then add the printer a Install a printer driver file on the computer 1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD and then double click the installer package for the printer Follow the instructions on the computer screen wn Select a destination and then click
228. ide and then gently pull it out Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the center of the fuser unit Doing so will damage the fuser Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Close the side door of the printer 4 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared Clearing jams 260 202 203 paper jams If paper is visible in the standard exit bin then firmly grasp the paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed lt Paper jam in the fuser 1 Open the side door of the printer A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 If paper is visible inside the fuser unit then open the fuser access door 3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the center of the fuser unit Doing so will damage the fuser Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 4 Close the side door Clearing jams 261 Paper jam under the fuser 1 Open the side door of the printer CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 If paper is visible under the fuser then firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are re
229. ides Duplex Use to specify if the original document is simplex printed on one page or duplex printed on both sides This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax Orientation Use to specify the orientation of the original document and then changes Sides and Binding to match the orientation Binding Use to specify if the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge side Scan Preview This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the fax When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Delayed Send This lets you send a fax at a later time or date 1 Set up your fax 2 From the home screen navigate to Delayed Send enter the date and time you want to send your fax Done Note If the printer is turned off when the delayed fax is scheduled to be sent then the fax is sent the next time the printer is turned on This setting can be especially useful in sending information to fax lines that are not readily available during certain hours or when transmission times are cheaper Advanced Options Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings ADF Skew Fix Use to correct slight skew in the scanned image Advanced Imaging Use to adjust the Background Removal Contrast Color Balance Negative Image Mirror Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail Sharpness and Temper
230. ied print cartridge Troubleshooting 285 88 xx color cartridge low 1 Remove the specified cartridge Warning Potential Damage Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs 2 Firmly shake the cartridge side to side and front to back several times to redistribute the toner 3 Reinsert the cartridge and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Notes Repeat this procedure multiple times until the print remains faded When the print remains faded replace the cartridge Have a new cartridge available when the current one no longer prints satisfactorily 88 xx Color cartridge very low The specified print cartridge is very low 1 For instructions on replacing a print cartridge from the printer control panel touch More Information 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 88 xx Color cartridge critically low The specified print cartridge is critically low 1 For instructions on replacing a print cartridge from the printer control panel touch More Information 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 840 01 Scanner disabled by admin Print without the scanner or contact your system support person 840 02 Scanner disabled Contact system administrator if problem persists The printer identified a problem with the scanner and automatically disabled it Try one or more of the following 1 Remov
231. iew or configure the wireless internal print server settings Note This menu is available only for models connected to a wireless network The Wireless menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network x gt Standard Network Setup or Network x Setup gt Wireless Menu item Description WPS PBC Mode Lets you connect the printer to a wireless network by pressing buttons on both the printer and the access point wireless router within a given period of time WPS PIN Mode Lets you connect the printer to a wireless network by using a PIN on the printer and entering it into the wireless settings of the access point WPS Auto Detect Automatically detects the connection method that an access point with Disable WPS uses WPS Push Button Configuration PBC or WPS Personal Enable Identification Number PIN Note Disable is the factory default setting Network Mode Specifies the network mode Ad hoc Notes Infrastructure e Ad hoc is the factory default setting This configures wireless connection directly between the printer and a computer Infrastructure lets the printer access a network using an access point Compatibility Specifies the wireless standard for the wireless network 802 11b g n Note The 802 11b g n is the factory default setting 802 11n 802 11b g Choose Network Lets you select an available network for the printer to use list of available networks View Signa
232. ignores the flash drive f you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs then Busy appears After these print jobs are processed you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive Printing 95 Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the USB cable any network adapter any connector the memory device or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing reading or writing from the memory device A loss of data can occur From the printer control panel touch Print from USB and then select the document you want to print 3 Touch the arrows to increase the number of copies to print and then touch Print Notes Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing f you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen then you can still print files from the flash drive as held jobs Printing 96 Supported flash drives and file types Flash drive File type Lexar JumpDrive 2 0 Pro 256MB 512MB or 1GB sizes Documents SanDisk Cruzer Mini 256MB 512MB or 1GB sizes pdf Notes e xps Images Hi Speed USB flash drives must support the Full Speed standard Devices supporting only USB ead low speed capabilities are not supported TOR USB flash drives must support the FAT File Allocation Tables system Devices formatted with NTFS gif New Technology File System or any other f
233. il Address to Send Logs Description Specifies the e mail address to which the device sends job accounting logs ps File Prefix file prefix Note The current host name defined in the TCP IP menu is used as the default log Finishing menu Menu item Sides Duplex 1 sided 2 sided Description Specifies whether duplex 2 sided printing is set as the default for all print jobs Notes e 1 sided is the factory default setting You can set 2 sided printing from the software program For Windows users click File gt Print and then click Properties Preferences Options or Setup For Macintosh users choose File gt Print and then adjust the settings from the print dialog and pop up menus Duplex Binding Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the On 1 2 1 2 1 2 Off 1 1 1 2 2 2 Long Edge page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page Short Edge Notes Long Edge is the factory default setting Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Copies Specifies the default number of copies for each print job 1 999 Note 1 is the factory default setting Blank Pages Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job Do Not Print Note Do Not Print is the
234. ile Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Font Priority Establishes the font search order Resident Notes Flash Disk Resident is the factory default setting This menu item is available only if a formatted flash memory option card or printer hard disk is installed and operating properly Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not read write write or password protected Job Buffer Size must not be set to 10096 Image Smoothing Enhances the contrast and sharpness of low resolution images and smooths Off their color transitions On Notes e Off is the factory default setting Image Smoothing has no effect on images that are 300 dpi or higher in resolution PCL Emul menu Menu item Description Font Source Specifies the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu item Resident Notes Disk Download Resident is the factory default setting It shows the factory default set of Flash fonts downloaded in RAM All Flash and Disk settings show all fonts resident in that option Make sure the flash option is properly formatted and is not read write or password protected Download shows all the fonts downloaded in RAM e All shows all fonts available to any option Understanding printer menus 232 Menu item Description Font Name Identifies a specific font and where it is stored RO Courier Note RO Courier is the factory default setting The RO Couri
235. ile system are not supported e JPEG jpg e bmp e pcx e TIFF e tif png Printing on specialty media Tips on using letterhead e Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities Before loading letterhead flex the sheets to prevent them from sticking together Observe proper page orientation Print side Paper orientation Standard 550 sheet tray Preprinted letterhead design is placed The top edge of the sheet with the logo is Optional 550 sheet tray faceup placed at the left side of the tray Optional 2000 sheet high capacity feeder Duplex two sided printing Preprinted letterhead design is placed The top edge of the sheet with the logo is from trays facedown placed at the right side of the tray Multipurpose feeder simplex Preprinted letterhead design is placed The top edge of the sheet with the logo printing facedown should enter the multipurpose feeder first Multipurpose feeder duplex Preprinted letterhead design is placed The top edge of the sheet with the logo printing faceup should enter the multipurpose feeder last Note Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the chosen preprinted letterhead is acceptable for laser printers Printing 97 Tips on using transparencies Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use be
236. imum size allowed Disabled 168 Description Sets the size of the USB input buffer Notes Auto is the factory default setting Disabled turns off job buffering Any jobs already buffered on the printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1 KB increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and network buffers Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Job Buffering Off On Auto Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing Notes Off is the factory default setting On buffers jobs on the printer hard disk Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Mac Binary PS Auto Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Notes On Off Auto is the factory default setting On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs e Off filters print jobs using
237. including duplex pages Use the scanner glass for single pages or book pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings or lightweight carbonless forms bs Using the ADF Load the document into the ADF faceup short edge first Load up to 75 sheets of plain paper in the ADF input tray Scan sizes from 76 x 139 mm 3 0 x 5 5 in to 215 x 355 mm 8 5 x 14 in Scan documents with mixed page sizes letter and legal Scan media weights from 52 to 120 g m 14 to 32 Ib Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass Using the scanner glass Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Scan or copy documents up to 215 x 355 mm 8 5 x 14 in Copy books up to 25 mm 1 in thick Learning about the printer 23 Understanding the printer control panel 1 Bl II Item Description 1 Display Lets you view scanning copying faxing and printing options as well as status and error messages 2 Indicator light e Off The power is off Blinking green The printer is warming up processing data or printing Solid green The printer is on but idle Blinking red Operator intervention is needed 3 Sleep Activates Sleep Mode or Hibernate Mo
238. ing data The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off NPA Mode Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional Auto communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol On Notes Off Auto is the factory default setting Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Parallel Buffer Auto 3KB to maximum size allowed Disabled Sets the size of the parallel input buffer Notes Auto is the factory default setting Disabled turns off job buffering Any print jobs already buffered on the printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1 KB increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer disable or reduce the size of the USB serial and network buffers Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Understanding printer menus Menu item Job Buffering Off On Auto 170 Description Tem
239. ing the fax with a PBX system see the documentation that came with your PBX system Faxing 125 Connecting to a distinctive ring service Adistinctive ring service may be available from your telephone service provider This service allows you to have multiple telephone numbers on one telephone line with each telephone number having a different ring pattern This may be useful for distinguishing between fax and voice calls If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service then follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack 3 Change the Distinctive Rings setting to match the setting you want for the printer to answer Note The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On This allows the printer to answer single double and triple ring patterns a From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Settings gt Distinctive Rings b Select the pattern setting you want to change and then touch Submit Connecting to an adapter for your country or region The following countries or regions may require a special adapter to connect the telephone cable to the active telephone wall jack Country Region Austria New Zealand Cyprus Netherlands Denmark Norway Finland Portugal France Sweden
240. inter you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Device Status The device status shows the following Paper tray settings Level of toner in the print cartridge Percentage of life remaining in the maintenance kit Capacity measurements of certain printer parts Setting up e mail alerts Configure the printer to send you e mail alerts when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed or added or when there is a paper jam 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Under Other Settings click E mail Alert Setup 4 Select the items for notification and type the e mail addresses 5 Click Submit Note For information on setting up the e mail server contact your system support person Viewing reports You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server These reports are useful for assessing the status of the printer the network and supplies To view reports from a network printer 1 Type the printer IP addres
241. inter base if you are using a high capacity input tray a duplex unit and an input option or more than one input option If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters Learning about the printer You can configure your basic printer by adding optional trays 1 2 Automatic Document Feeder ADF ADF input tray Printer control panel Standard exit bin Front door Standard 550 sheet trays Tray 1 Multipurpose feeder Side door O OINI anal na BP UU NM n Jam access doors HB e Optional 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder pa IB Optional 550 sheet trays HB N Caster base Basic functions of the scanner The scanner provides copy fax and scan to network capability for large workgroups You can Make quick copies or change the settings on the printer control panel to perform specific copy jobs Send a faxusing the printer control panel e Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time Scan documents and send them to your computer an e mail address a flash drive or an FTP destination Scan documents and send them to another printer PDF by way of FTP Learning about the printer 22 Understanding the ADF and scanner glass Automatic Document Feeder ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple pages
242. inting 5 Insert the tray Loading paper and specialty media 80 Loading the multipurpose feeder The multipurpose feeder can hold several sizes and types of print media such as transparencies labels card stock and envelopes It can be used for single page or manual printing or as an additional tray The multipurpose feeder can hold approximately 100 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ib paper 10envelopes 75transparencies The multipurpose feeder accepts paper or specialty media within the following dimensions e Width 89 mm 3 5 in to 229 mm 9 02 in Length 127 mm 5 in to 1270 mm 50 in Note Maximum width and length can be applied only to short edge feeding Note Do not add or remove paper or specialty media when the printer is printing from the multipurpose feeder or when the printer control panel indicator light is blinking Doing so may cause a jam 1 Pull down the multipurpose feeder door 2 For paper or specialty media that is longer than letter size paper gently pull the extension until it is fully extended Loading paper and specialty media 81 3 Flex the sheets of paper or specialty media back and forth to loosen them Do not fold or crease them Straighten the edges on a level surface Paper Envelopes Transparencies Note Avoid scratching or touching the print side V y 4 Push the paper pick tab and then load the paper or specialty media Slide the stack gently
243. inting resulting in a jam Partial sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive and could void the printer and cartridge warranties Do not use labels with exposed adhesive Do not print within 1 mm 0 04 in of the edge of the label of the perforations or between die cuts of the label Be sure adhesive backing does not reach to the sheet edge Zone coating of the adhesive at least 1 mm 0 04 in away from edges is recommended Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty e f zone coating of the adhesive is not possible remove a 1 6 mm 0 06 in strip on the leading and driver edge and use a non oozing adhesive Portrait orientation works best especially when printing bar codes Tips on using card stock Card stock is heavy single ply specialty media Many of its variable characteristics such as moisture content thickness and texture can significantly impact print quality Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities When printing on card stock Make sure the Paper Type is Card Stock Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting Be aware that preprinting perforation and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper handling problems Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 190 C 374 F without releasing hazardous emissio
244. into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop and then release the paper pick tab Warning Potential Damage Pulling the paper out without pushing the paper pick tab first may cause jams or the paper pick tab to break Load paper and transparencies with the recommended print side facedown and the short edge entering the printer first For duplex letterhead printing place the letterhead faceup and the header entering the printer last Loading paper and specialty media 82 Load envelopes with the flap side up and to the right Warning Potential Damage Never use envelopes with stamps clasps snaps windows coated linings or self stick adhesives These envelopes may severely damage the printer Notes Do not exceed the maximum stack height by forcing paper or transparencies under the stack height limiter Load only one size and type of paper at a time 5 Adjust the width guide to lightly touch the edge of the stack Make sure the paper or specialty media fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder lies flat and is not bent or wrinkled 6 From the printer control panel set the Paper Size and Paper Type for the multipurpose feeder MP Feeder Size and MP Feeder Type based on the paper or specialty media loaded Linking and unlinking trays Linking trays Tray linking is useful for large print jobs or multiple copies When one linked tray is empty paper feeds from the next linked tray When the Paper Si
245. ion on configuring 802 1X security see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD Installing the printer on a wireless network Windows Before installing the printer on a wireless network make sure Your wireless network is set up and working properly The computer you are using is connected to the same wireless network where you want to set up the printer Additional printer setup 59 1 Connect the power cable to the printer and then to a properly grounded electrical outlet and then turn the printer on Make sure the printer and computer are fully on and ready 3 Click Install and then follow the instructions on the computer screen 4 Select Wireless connection when asked to choose a connection type 5 From the Wireless Configuration dialog select Guided Setup Recommended Note Choose Advanced Setup only if you want to customize your installation Additional printer setup 60 6 Temporarily connect a USB cable between the computer on the wireless network and the printer Note After the printer is configured the software will instruct you to disconnect the temporary USB cable so you can print wirelessly 7 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Note For more information on allowing other computers on the network to use the wireless printer see the Networking Guide Installing the printer on a wireless network Macintosh Make sure to disconnect the Ethernet cable when installin
246. ional Inc deklar ka Sis izstr d jums atbilst Direkt vas 1999 5 EK b tiskaj m pras b m un citiem ar to saist tajiem noteikumiem Lietuvi iuo Lexmark International Inc deklaruoja kad is produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999 5 EB direktyvos nuostatas Malti Bil pre enti Lexmark International Inc jiddikjara li dan il prodott huwa konformi mal ti ijiet essenzjali u ma dispo izzjonijiet o rajn relevanti li jinsabu fid Direttiva 1999 5 KE Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International Inc dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essenti le eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999 5 EG Norsk Lexmark International Inc erkl rer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Polski Niniejszym Lexmark International Inc o wiadcza e niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozosta ymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999 5 EC Portugu s A Lexmark International Inc declara que este este produto est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposi es da Diretiva 1999 5 CE Slovensky Lexmark International Inc t mto vyhlasuje e tento produkt sp a z kladn po iadavky a v etky pr slu n ustanovenia smernice 1999 5 ES Slovensko Lexmark International Inc izjavlja da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi dolo ili
247. is supported on 64 176 g m 17 47 Ib paper weights Note Labels transparencies envelopes and card stock always print at reduced speed Paper type Standard Optional Optional Multipurpose Duplexer 550 sheet tray 550 sheettray 2 000 sheet tray feeder Tray 1 Paper v v v y y e Plain e Recycled e Glossy Heavy Glossy Bond Letterhead Preprinted Colored Light Heavy Rough Cotton Custom Type x Card stock y y X y y Transparencies 2 X X X y X Labels y y X i J Paper Vinyl Envelopes X X X J X 1 This media is supported only in the multipurpose feeder 2 Do not use inkjet or 3M CG3710 transparencies 3 Paper labels are supported Other media such as vinyl may show print quality defects in some environments and prolonged vinyl label usage may reduce fuser life For more information see the Card Stock amp Label Guide available on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Use envelopes that lie flat when individually placed facedown on a table NS Supported finishing features The printer supports the following finishing features 500 Sheet Offset Stacker 500 Sheet Staple Finisher Paper and specialty media guidelines 91 500 Sheet Staple Hole Punch Finisher 5 bin mailbox 1 Standard bin 2 Finisher bin pea kite Standard bin The paper capacity is 500 sheets Finishing options are not supported
248. isable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and USB buffers Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Job Buffering Off On Auto Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing This menu only appears if a formatted disk is installed Notes Offis the factory default setting On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Understanding printer menus 163 Menu item Description Mac Binary PS Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Auto Notes On Off Auto is the factory default setting e Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs Standard Network Setup Displays and sets the printer network settings Reports Note The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless Network Card network TCP IP IPv6 Wireless AppleTalk Network x Setup Reports Network Card TCP IP IPv6 Wireless AppleTalk Network Reports menu This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Networ
249. istrator information ccccccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannano non on onononnnns 254 Using the Embedded Web Server cccsscssscsscccecccceceecsccssnsanaeeeeeeeseeceseeseesesesesseesaeaeeaeeseeeeeeseeeeseesesesesees 254 Checking the virtual display enne enn nnnm nnn nnne ener enne rn nnns 254 Checking the status Of the printer i2 eec iine i nee tede rene E ae Oen A 254 Setting p e miail alerts ta arena EA E eua aee pues ke Precor eaa S aep agas 255 Viewing FOP OMS ENT e 255 Restoring factory default SettingS ccccccccccsssssssssssnsneececeeceecesceseesssnsnsaeeseecesceseeessausaeaeeseeeeeseeeeseseses 256 COMINO Arp Mee Ad Avoiding AOS eoe eere re rer a HER E aa 257 Understanding jam numbers and locations ccccccccessesssessssececeeceeceeeecessesesesnsnssesaeaeeseceeeeeeessuseseseeees 257 200 paper A M c TIE 259 ZO AM reete tere eee Dee evi eee 259 202 203 paper JdITis s 5 2 3 eret A dede iaa Bases AAA AAA eese eee une d eda to ida 260 230 paper atis ios edet teeth urere Eee a eins ta DE Ep thas dia 261 231 239 Pap r AMS A E eee ERE t oeste et eene etes excuse ete dide Con beached Tee Maeda bee 262 ZAK paper JaIiNz cseoioues sert att see TE 262 230 Paper Mia A AA e OP aise E Ee ERE dE A ea eae 263 280 289 paper JarTis de ii 264 290 292 paper Jami 5 3 rese eet do 265 400 403 and 460 461 paper jams ccccccccccccccscssssssss
250. itutions are allowed Setting a size substitution lets a print job continue without a Change Paper message appearing s Paper Texture menu Menu item Description Plain Texture Specifies the relative texture of the plain paper loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Rough Smooth Card Stock Texture Specifies the relative texture of the card stock loaded Normal Notes Rough Smooth Normal is the factory default setting Settings appear only if card stock is supported Transparency Texture Specifies the relative texture of the transparencies loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Rough Smooth Recycled Texture Specifies the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Rough Smooth Glossy Texture Specifies the relative texture of the glossy paper loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Rough Smooth Heavy Glossy Texture Specifies the relative texture of the glossy paper loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Rough Smooth Labels Texture Specifies the relative texture of the labels loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Rough Smooth s P Understanding printer menus Menu item Vinyl Labels Texture Normal Rough Smooth Specifies the relative texture of the vinyl labels loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting 153 D
251. jobs Notes On Off Auto is the factory default setting e Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs ENA Address Sets the network address information for an external print server YYY YYY YYV YYY Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port ENA Netmask Sets the netmask information for an external print server YYY YYY YYY YYY Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Understanding printer menus 171 Menu item Description ENA gateway Sets the gateway information for an external print server YYY YYY YYV YYY Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Serial x menu Menu item Description PCL SmartSwitch Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received On through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes On is the factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off PS SmartSwitch Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job receive
252. k or Network x gt Standard Network Setup or Network Setup gt Reports or Network Reports Menuitem Descipion 55000 Print Setup Page Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address Network Card menu This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports Standard Network or Network x Standard Network Setup or Network x Setup Network Card Menu item Description View Card Status Lets you view the connection status of the network card Connected Disconnected View Card Speed Lets you view the speed of a currently active network card j NS Understanding printer menus 164 z Menu item Description View Network Address Lets you view the network addresses UAA LAA End of Job Timeout Sets the amount of time in seconds before a network print job is canceled 0 255 Notes 90 seconds is the factory default setting Asetting value of 0 disables the timeout e f a value of 1 9 is selected then the setting is saved as 10 Banner Page Allows the printer to print a banner page Off Note Off is the factory default setting On My TCP IP menu This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network x gt Standard Network Setup or Network x Setup gt TCP IP Note This menu is available only in network models or printers attached to print servers Menu
253. k product or Software Program is not otherwise subject to a written software license agreement between you and Lexmark or its suppliers governs your use of any Software Program installed on or provided by Lexmark for use in connection with your Lexmark product The term Software Program includes machine readable instructions audio visual content such as images and recordings and associated media printed materials and electronic documentation whether incorporated into distributed with or for use with your Lexmark product 1 STATEMENT OF SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY Lexmark warrants that the media e g diskette or compact disk on which the Software Program if any is furnished is free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use during the warranty period The warranty period is ninety 90 days and commences on the date the Software Program is delivered to the original end user This limited warranty applies only to Software Program media purchased new from Lexmark or an Authorized Lexmark Reseller or Distributor Lexmark will replace the Software Program should it be determined that the media does not conform to this limited warranty 2 DISCLAIMER AND LIMITATION OF WARRANTIES EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT AND TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW LEXMARK AND ITS SUPPLIERS PROVIDE THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM AS IS AND HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
254. l Quality Lets you view the quality of the wireless connection View Security Mode Lets you view the encryption method that a wireless network uses Note Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS is a simple and secure configuration that allows you to establish a wireless network and enable network security without requiring prior knowledge of Wi Fi technology It is no longer necessary to configure the network name SSID and WEP key or WPA passphrase for network devices AppleTalk menu This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Understanding printer menus 167 Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network x gt Standard Network Setup or Network x Setup gt AppleTalk Menu item Description Activate Activates AppleTalk support Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No View Name Shows the assigned AppleTalk name Note The name can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server View Address Shows the assigned AppleTalk address Note The address can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Set Zone Provides a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network default Note When default is selected the printer uses the AppleTalk zone that the list of zones available on the network router identifies as the default zone for the network If no default zone exists then the zone marked with an is the default setting NG Standard USB menu Menu item Description PCL SmartSwitch Sets
255. l Univers Menu item Description Font Size Sets the default font size for HTML documents 1 255 pt Notes 12 ptis the factory default setting e Font size can be increased in 1 point increments Scale Scales the default font for HTML documents 1 400 Notes 100 is the factory default setting e Scaling can be increased in 1 increments Understanding printer menus 235 Menu item Description Orientation Sets the page orientation for HTML documents Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Margin Size Sets the page margin for HTML documents 8 255 mm Notes 19 mm is the factory default setting Margin size can be increased in 1 mm increments Backgrounds Specifies whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents Print Note Print is the factory default setting Do Not Print X y Image menu Menu item Description Auto Fit Selects the optimal paper size scaling and orientation On Note On is the factory default setting It overrides scaling and orientation settings Off for some images Invert Inverts bi tonal monochrome images Off Notes On e Off is the factory default setting This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images Scaling Scales the image to fit the selected paper size Best Fit Notes Anchor Center Fit Height Width Best Fit is the factory default setting Fit Height When Auto Fit is set to On Scaling is automatic
256. l the copy job touch Cancel Job on the touch screen A Canceling scan job screen appears The ADF clears all pages in the ADF and cancels the job Copying 110 Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen A Canceling scan job screen appears Once the job is canceled the copy screen appears Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed 1 From the home screen touch Cancel Job or press X on the keypad 2 Touch the job you want to cancel 3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs Understanding the copy screens and options Copy from This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size of the original document Touch a paper size that matches the original document Touch Mixed Sizes to copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width Touch Auto Size Sense to allow the scanner to automatically determine the size of the original document Copy to This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size and type on which your copies will be printed Touch the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded fthe settings for Copy from and Copy to are different then the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting to accommodate the difference If the paper type or size that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays then touch Manual Feeder and manually load the paper in the multipurpose feed
257. lect a port type enter necessary information OK f Click Continue 1 If you want to add another printer then click Add Another 2 If you want to make changes then select a printer and then click Edit 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen g Click Finish 3 Setthe COM port parameters After installing the printer driver set the serial parameters in the COM port assigned to the printer driver Note Make sure the serial parameters in the COM port match the serial parameters you set in the printer a Openthe Device Manager 1 Click e or click Start and then click Run 2 In the Start Search or Run box type devmgmt msc 3 Press Enter or click OK Look for Ports and then click to expand the list of available ports Right click the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer example COM1 Click Properties aoa c On the Port Settings tab set the serial parameters to the same serial parameters in the printer Check the serial heading of the menu settings page for the printer settings Click OK and then close all the windows g Print a test page to verify printer installation Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 68 Minimizing your printer s environmental impact Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact on the environment We design with the environment in mind engineer our packaging to reduce material
258. lected then the entire job must be rescanned if any pages jam f Page level is selected then rescan from the jammed page forward Understanding printer menus Menu item Web Page Refresh Rate 30 300 185 Description Specifies the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server refreshes Note 120 seconds is the factory default setting Contact Name Specifies a contact name for the printer Note The contact name will be stored on the Embedded Web Server Alarm Control Cartridge Alarm Staple Alarm Hole Punch Alarm Location Specifies the location of the printer Note The location will be stored on the Embedded Web Server Alarms Sets an alarm to sound when the printer requires user intervention Available options for each alarm type are Off Single Continuous Notes Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control and Cartridge Alarm Single sounds three quick beeps e Offis the factory default setting for Staple Alarm and Hole Punch Alarm Off means no alarm will sound Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds Screen Timeout 15 300 sec Timeouts Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity before the system Standby Mode enters a lower power state Disabled Note 15 is the factory default setting 1 240 Timeouts Sets the amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed Sleep Mode before it goes into a reduced power state 1 240 min Notes Disabled
259. lems 300 cannot detect flash memory card 300 cannot detect printer hard disk 300 internal print server 301 Internal Solutions Port 300 memory card 301 option does not work 299 paper tray problems 299 USB parallel interface card 301 troubleshooting scan cannot scan from a computer 294 partial document or photo scans 293 scan was not successful 292 scanner unit does not close 290 scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 292 U understanding the home screen buttons and icons 24 uneven print density 314 Universal Paper Size 158 setting 74 Universal Setup menu 158 unlinking trays 83 Unsupported USB device please remove 272 updating options in printer driver 57 USB port 54 USB parallel interface card troubleshooting 301 using Eco Mode 69 using Hibernate Mode 71 using Quiet Mode 69 using recycled paper 68 using shortcuts sending fax 129 using the address book 116 sending fax 129 using the Embedded Web Server 254 using the ScanBack Utility 142 using the touch screen buttons 25 Utilities menu 229 V verify print jobs 98 printing from a Macintosh computer 99 printing from Windows 99 viewing reports 255 347 viewing a faxlog 131 virtual display checking using Embedded Web Server 254 volatile memory erasing 237 W waste toner bottle ordering 247 replacing 251 wired network setup using Macintosh 62 using Windows 62 Wireless menu 166 wireless network configuration informati
260. line or incorrectly colored line appears on prints 305 poor transparency quality 314 print irregularities 306 print is too dark 307 print is too light 308 repeating print defects 309 shadow images appear on prints 304 skewed print 310 solid color or black pages appear on prints 310 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 311 streaked vertical lines 312 toner fog or background shading 312 toner rubs off 313 toner specks 314 uneven print density 314 white streaks on a page 311 print troubleshooting error reading flash drive 286 held jobs do not print 287 343 incorrect characters print 288 incorrect margins 305 jammed pages are not reprinted 302 job prints from wrong tray 288 job prints on wrong paper 288 jobs do not print 286 Large jobs do not collate 289 multiple language PDF files do not print 286 paper curl 306 paper frequently jams 302 print job takes longer than expected 288 tray linking does not work 288 unexpected page breaks occur 289 printer configurations 20 finishing features 90 minimum clearances 19 moving 19 252 253 selecting a location 19 shipping 253 printer configurations 20 printer control panel 23 adjusting brightness 71 factory defaults restoring 256 printer hard disk encrypting 239 installing 46 removing 51 troubleshooting 300 printer hard disk encryption 239 printer information where to find 18 printer messages 1565 Emulation error load emulation option 286 31 xx Missing or Defecti
261. line then follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack Faxing 124 Connecting to a DSL service If you subscribe to a DSL service then contact the DSL provider to obtain a DSL filter and telephone cord and then follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the DSL filter Note Your DSL filter may look different than the one in the illustration 3 Connect the DSL filter cable to an active telephone wall jack Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system If you use a PBX or ISDN converter or terminal adapter then follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the port designated for fax and telephone use Notes Make sure the terminal adapter is set to the correct switch type for your region Depending on the ISDN port assignment you may have to connect to a specific port When using a PBX system make sure the call waiting tone is off When using a PBX system dial the outside line prefix before dialing the fax number For more information on us
262. ll and unplug any cables going into the printer You can customize your printer connectivity and memory capacity by adding optional cards The instructions in this section explain how to install the available cards you can also use them to locate a card for removal Available internal options Memory cards Printer memory Flash memory Fonts Firmware cards Bar Code PrintCryption Lexmark Internal Solutions Ports ISP RS 232 C Serial ISP Parallel 1284 B ISP MarkNet N8250 802 11 b g n Wireless ISP MarkNet N8130 10 100 Fiber ISP MarkNet N8120 10 100 1000 Ethernet ISP Additional printer setup 34 Using the security lock feature The printer is equipped with a security lock feature When a lock compatible with most laptop computers is attached the printer is locked Once locked the metal plate and the system board cannot be removed Attach a security lock to the printer in the location shown Additional printer setup 35 Accessing the system board CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver 1 Open the cove
263. llowing Touch Use current paper source to ignore the message and print from the selected tray Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu and then touch Paper changed continue Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Change paper source to custom string Try one or more of the following Touch Use current paper source to ignore the message and print from the selected tray Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu and then touch Paper changed continue Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Change paper source to custom string load orientation Try one or more of the following Touch Use current paper source to ignore the message and print from the selected tray Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu and then touch Paper changed continue Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Change paper source to paper size paper type Try one or more of the following Touch Use current paper source to ignore the message and print from the selected tray Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer control panel
264. lt Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 210 Description Specifies which color to drop during scanning and how much to increase or decrease the dropout Notes None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Contrast Best for content 0 5 Specifies the contrast of the output Note Best for content is the factory default setting Mirror Image Off On Creates a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Negative Image Creates a negative image of the original document Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Shadow Detail Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image 4 to 4 Note 0 is the factory default setting ADF Skew Fix Corrects slight skew in the scanned image off Note Off is the factory default setting On Scan edge to edge Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge to edge off Note Off is the factory default setting On Sharpness Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image 1 5 Note 3 is the factory default setting Temperature Enables the user to specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer Ato4 output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default Use cc bcc Enables the use of the cc and bcc fields Of
265. ly connected to the Internal Solutions ISP port IVIAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY For information on installing the network printing software see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD Internal print server does not operate correctly Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PRINT SERVER CONNECTIONS Make sure the internal print server is attached securely to the printer system board Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected MIAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY For more information on installing the network printing software do the following 1 Open the Software and Documentation CD 2 Click Additional 3 Under Publications on this CD select Networking Guide Memory card Make sure the memory card is securely connected to the printer system board USB parallel interface card does not operate correctly CHECK THE USB PARALLEL INTERFACE CARD CONNECTION Make sure the USB parallel interface card is securely connected to the printer system board CHECK THE CABLE Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected Troubleshooting 302 Solving paper feed problems Paper frequently jams These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER Use recommended paper and specialty media For more information see the chapter about paper and specialty media guidelines
266. m a newspaper Press Use when the original document was printed using a printing press Other Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Darkness This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document Send As This option sets the output PDF TIFF JPEG or XPS for the scanned image PDF Creates a single file with multiple pages viewable with Adobe Reader Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www adobe com Secure PDF Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access TIFF Creates multiple files or a single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG e JPEG Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs e XPS Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages viewable using an Internet Explorer hosted viewer and the NET Framework or by downloading a third party standalone viewer E mailing 120 Page Setup This option lets you change the Sides Duplex Orientation and Binding Sides Duplex Specifies if the original document is simplex printed on one page or duplex printed on both sides This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion
267. mage Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs 2 Firmly shake the cartridge side to side and front to back several times to redistribute the toner 3 Reinsert the print cartridge If the problem continues the printer may need to be serviced For more information contact Customer Support Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints Troubleshooting Try one or more of the following SELECT ANOTHER TRAY OR FEEDER From the printer control panel Paper Menu select Default Source For Windows users select the paper source from Print Properties For Macintosh users select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop up menus IVIAKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN DEFECTIVE OR EMPTY PRINT CARTRIDGE Replace the worn defective or empty print cartridge Streaked vertical lines These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following THE TONER IS SMEARED Select another tray or feeder to feed paper for the job From the printer control panel select the Default Source from the Paper Menu For Windows users select the paper source from Print Properties For Macintosh users select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop up menus A TONER CARTRIDGE IS DEFECTIVE Replace the defective toner cartridge THE TRANSFER MODULE IS WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the transfer module Toner fog or background shading appears on a page Try one or more
268. matted non defective printer hard disk is installed 2 From the Disk encryption menu select Enable Notes Enabling disk encryption will erase the content of the printer hard disk Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks 3 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down BA and ay while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears Once the printer is fully powered up the touch screen displays a list of functions instead of standard home screen icons such as Copy or Fax 3 Touch Disk Encryption Enable Note Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk 4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task After the disk has been encrypted the printer will return to the Enable Disable screen Notes Do notturn off the printer during the encryption process Doing so may result in loss of data Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks 5 Touch Back and then Exit Config Menu The printer will power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Maintaining the printer 24
269. may terminate your license upon notice if you fail to comply with any of the terms of this License Agreement Upon such termination you agree to destroy all copies of the Software Program together with all modifications documentation and merged portions in any form TAXES You agree that you are responsible for payment of any taxes including without limitation any goods and services and personal property taxes resulting from this Agreement or your Use of the Software Program LIMITATION ON ACTIONS No action regardless of form arising out of this Agreement may be brought by either party more than two years after the cause of action has arisen except as provided under applicable law APPLICABLE LAW This Agreement is governed by the laws of the Commonwealth of Kentucky United States of America No choice of law rules in any jurisdiction shall apply The UN Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS The Software Program has been developed entirely at private expense Rights of the United States Government to use the Software Program is as set forth in this Agreement and as restricted in DFARS 252 227 7014 and in similar FAR provisions or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause CONSENT TO USE OF DATA You agree that Lexmark its affiliates and agents may collect and use information you provide in relation to support services performed with respect to
270. mber must be provided to your telephone company This equipment uses the RJ 11C Universal Service Order Code USOC jack A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant See your setup documentation for more information The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected toa telephone line Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be Notices 326 connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact your local telephone company For products approved after July 23 2001 the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US AAAEQHHTXXXX The digits represented by are the REN without a decimal point for example 03 is a REN of 0 3 For earlier products the REN is shown separately on the label If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required If advance notice is not practical th
271. me for a paper type This name replaces the Custom none Type x name in the printer menus Understanding printer menus 158 Custom Bin Names menu Description Standard Bin Specifies a custom name for the Standard Bin Bin x Specifies a custom name for Bin x Custom Scan Sizes menu Menu item Description Custom Scan Size x Specifies a custom scan size name scan sizes and options The custom scan size Scan Size Name name replaces Custom Scan Size x inthe printer menus Width Notes 1 8 5 inches 25 215 9 mm 8 5 inches is the US factory default setting for Width 210 millimeters is Height a E the international factory default setting for Width 1 25 inches 25 635 mm Oiertati h 14inches is the US factory default setting for Height 297 millimeters is a the international factory default setting for Height ortrait Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation Landscape 2 scans per side e Off is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side Off On Universal Setup menu These menu items are used to specify the height and width of the Universal paper size The Universal paper size is a user defined paper size setting It is listed with the other paper size settings and includes similar options such as support for duplex printing and printing multiple pages on one sheet Menu item Description Units of Measure Identifies the unit of measure Inches
272. ming fax job Note 1 is the factory default setting Auto Reduction On Off Scales an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated fax source Note On is the factory default setting Paper Source Auto Tray x Multi Purpose Feeder Specifies the paper source selected to supply paper for the printer to print an incoming fax Output Bin Specifies an output bin for received faxes Standard Bin Note Bin 1 is available only when the finisher is installed Bin 1 x Sides Duplex Enables duplex printing two sided printing for incoming fax jobs Off On Understanding printer menus Menu item Separator Sheets None Before Job After Job 201 Description Enables the printer to include separator sheets in the output Separator Sheet Source Tray x Manual Feeder Specifies where the printer will pick the separator sheet Fax Footer Off On Prints the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax Note Off is the factory default setting Max Speed 33600 2400 4800 9600 14400 Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received Fax Forwarding Print Print and Forward Forward Enables forwarding of received faxes to another recipient Forward to Fax E mail FTP LDSS eSF Specifies the type of recipient to which faxes will be forwarded Note This item is available only from the print
273. moved 3 Close the side door of the printer 4 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared 230 paper jam 1 Open the side door of the printer A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 Slide the latch to open the duplex cover 3 Grasp the jammed paper and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 4 Close the duplex cover 5 Close the side door of the printer 6 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared Clearing jams 262 231 239 paper jams 1 Open the side door of the printer A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 Slide the latch to open the duplex cover 3 Grasp the jammed paper and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 4 Close the duplex cover 5 Close the side door of the printer 6 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared 24x paper jam Paper jam in Tray 1 1 Open the side door 2 Grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out 3 Close the side door 4 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared Clearing jams 263 Paper jam in the optional trays 1 Open the side door of the specified optional tray
274. n shortcut 127 creating an FTP shortcut 137 creating e mail shortcuts 115 functions 254 initial fax setup 122 networking settings 254 problem accessing 318 setting up e mail alerts 255 using 254 Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide where to find 254 emission notices 321 322 325 329 330 Empty the hole punch box 272 encrypting the printer hard disk 239 enlarging a copy 106 envelopes loading in multipurpose feeder 80 tips on using 97 environmental settings brightness adjusting 71 conserving supplies 68 Hibernate Mode 71 Quiet Mode 69 Sleep Mode 70 standard exit bin lighting 72 erasing volatile memory 237 Ethernet networking Macintosh 62 Windows 62 Ethernet port 54 exit bins linking 83 exporting a configuration using the Embedded Web Server 32 exporting a configuration using the Embedded Web Server 32 exterior of the printer cleaning 240 e mail canceling 118 e mail alerts low supply levels 255 paper jam 255 setting up 255 e mail function setting up 114 e mail screen advanced options 120 options 118 119 120 E mail Settings menu 205 e mail shortcuts creating using the Embedded Web Server 115 e mail sending using a shortcut number 116 using the address book 116 using the touch screen 116 e mailing adding message line 117 adding subject line 117 changing output file type 117 configuring e mail settings 114 creating shortcuts using the Embedded Web Server 115 creating shortcuts using the touch screen
275. n at a time is active If you want to switch the connection type between wired and wireless you must first turn the printer off connect the cable to switch to a wired connection or disconnect the cable to switch to a wireless connection and then turn the printer on For Windows users 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Click e or click Start and then click Run 3 In the Start Search or Run box type control printers 6 7 8 9 10 Press Enter or click OK The printer folder opens Locate the printer that has changed Note If there is more than one copy of the printer then update all of them with the new IP address Right click the printer Click Properties Ports tab Select the port from the list and then click Configure Port Type the new IP address in the Printer Name or IP Address field Click OK Close For Macintosh users 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Additional printer setup 66 If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print
276. n cleaning the exterior of the printer unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections such as the fax feature power cord or telephone during a lightning storm CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high capacity input tray a duplex unit and an input option or more than one input option If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each paper drawer or tray separately Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Learning about the printer 18 Learning about the printer Thank you for choosing this printer We ve worked hard to make sure it will meet your needs To start using your new printer right away use the setup materials that came with the printer and then skim the User s Guide to learn how to perform basic tasks To get the most out of your printer read the User s Guide carefully and make sure you check the latest updates on our Web site We
277. n error load emulation option 286 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder installing 53 200 paper jam 259 2000 sheet high capacity feeder loading 78 201 paper jam 259 202 203 paper jams 260 230 paper jam 261 231 239 paper jams 262 24x paper jam 262 250 paper jam 263 280 289 paper jam 264 290 292 paper jams 265 31 xx Missing or Defective color cartridge 278 32 xx color cartridge part number unsupported by device 278 34 Incorrect paper size open src 278 35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 278 37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation 279 37 Insufficient memory to collate job 279 37 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 279 37 Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored 279 38 Memory full 279 39 Complex page some data may not have printed 279 40 color invalid refill change cartridge 279 400 403 paper jams 265 431 438 paper jams 266 455 staple jam 266 460 461 paper jams 265 51 Defective flash detected 280 52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 280 53 Unformatted flash detected 280 54 Network x software error 280 54 Serial option x error 280 54 Standard network software error 280 55 Unsupported option in slot x 281 550 sheet tray installing 53 550 sheet tray standard or optional loading 75 56 Parallel port x disabled 281 56 Serial port x disabled 281 56 Standard parallel port dis
278. n nn nora tn rena 161 Network Reports menu dica 163 Network Card menu nie ts a t et Put d e ie aa oe eee eee 163 TCP IP rieriu ist tie e PD aia p itai ov titi ivi tie a ee M le ER P Ts 164 A Un 165 Contents 9 Wireless Ment ia dios 166 ApplerTall menUus eee A dee eae nate a 166 Staridard USB merui itte adas 167 Parallel MENU iii cite hee cet trit ee edet tr iuc eet c don on da fes ici o dE dire renta vel 169 Serial X MENU iei ret e e dc 171 SM TP Set p mernu nein doe Ere ias 173 SeCUrIty MENUS uites cae Cope etae ere on core EH Ede Eve bre De ea da etd E ede EACH deum de Tee eo ae eon Due VR EEG 174 Editing Security Setups menu nete lit E ae raia aaiae oeae atainot 174 Miscellaneous Security Settings menu esses eene nennen eene nnns enne nnnn sss e ene tenns sss enne nnns nnn 175 Confidential Print mien erret eE isa 176 DiskWiping menmnlbsst nsa nt do Ds O halits o E ANTT eae state 176 Security Audit Log menu enn aine M I AT M 177 Set Date and Time menu miii o HERR ERE ER CENE ERE E NIRE a ti 178 Settings Imien seo eoe teo toti ee oe nea oe a bea dase Pace aan codec sae eso SER vecta de aa bea e denn epa aeo ee 179 CCS ECT EHI nui dado 179 Copy Settings tren eoi retineo trienio i n 188 resedit iaaa 194 E mail Settings MENU cin a ia adn ne Dev ded 205 FTP Settings miebill ret occ a eter giant ke gute das steel eee 211 Fl sh Drive menu aiie A A A A Ai 215 A o OR 22
279. n the Embedded Web Server is available for a range of functions including Viewing a virtual display of the printer control panel Checking the status of the printer supplies Configuring printer settings Configuring network settings Viewing reports To access the Embedded Web Server for your printer 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Notes f you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and then locate the IP address in the TCP IP section e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Embedded Web Server correctly 2 Press Enter Checking the virtual display 1 Open an Embedded Web Server associated with your printer Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Check the virtual display that appears in the top left corner of the screen The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel showing printer messages Checking the status of the printer 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Administrative support 255 If you do not know the IP address of the pr
280. n the original Pres document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Laser e Black White is used when the original document was printed using a black white laser printer Photo Film UE A M Newspaper Inkjet is used when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer Other Photo Film is used when the original document is a photo from film Magazine is used when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper is used when the original document is from a newspaper e Press is used when the original document was printed using a printing press Other is used when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Darkness Lightens or darkens the output 1 9 Note 5 is the factory default setting Dial Prefix Lets you enter a dialing prefix such as 99 A numeric entry field is provided Dialing Prefix Rules Prefix Rule x Establishes a dialing prefix rule Automatic Redial 0 9 Specifies the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number Note 5 is the factory default setting Redial Frequency 1 200 Specifies the number of minutes between redials Behind a PABX No Yes Enables switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone Enable ECM Yes No Enables Error Correction Mode for fax jobs Enable Fax Scans On Off Lets you fax files that are scanned at the computer Driver to fax Yes No Allows the driver to fax job
281. name that does not accurately describe the type of paper loaded in a tray The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified Paper Type Prints may not be properly processed if an inaccurate Paper Type is selected Linking exit bins Link exit bins to create a single output source The printer automatically uses the next available bin as the output source The standard exit bin holds up to 550 sheets of 20 Ib paper If you need additional output capacity you can purchase other optional exit bins Note Not all exit bins support every paper size and type 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Bin Setup 2 Touch the bin or bins you want to link and then touch Configure Bins gt Link Creating a custom name for a paper type If the printer is on a network you can use the Embedded Web Server to define a name other than Custom Type x for each of the custom paper types loaded into the printer 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Loading paper and specialty media 84 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu gt Custom Name gt type a name gt Submit Note This custom name will replace the Custom
282. nation shortcut using the touch screen ccccccooccnnnncononnnncnnnnonnnnnnnnononnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonos 128 Sending ada A Ad ia 128 Sending a fax using the touch screen cccesessssccesssesseeeccesessnsecescesusececessseeecesseesseeesesesesssececesessseaseeeseeseaaeass 128 Sending a tax using the computer aee ak eA ee ede fee cere re ee 128 Sendinga fax sing shortcuts nt e te meme 129 Sending a fax using the address DOOK cccessssccessssssececcesssesseceeceesssesesessuseecesesesaeeeseseseseseeeseseaesseeeseeseaaeaes 129 Contents 7 CUSTOMIZING Tax Settings irte eie be e d aed de iere e He eade se Aid 130 Changing the fax resolution t n bete tetti desertis iadridda 130 Making a fax lighter or darker iit sse ae iae cate ee ridet boe hate elc ade dodo dade 130 Sending a fax at a scheduled time o oo cccccnoococnncconanonnnononononononnnnonnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn n nana nn ao ron nnne nnn nnns 130 Viewing a fax log sisi eto eee ei det enam Colles mid e mttefibeste ide 131 Blocking junk faxes o eth ect eene e e EDU eem E eT 131 Canceling an outgoing TX it Ee de SE ERR KE rei ea ue node uua Ee YR Va Tea Edad 131 Canceling a fax while the original documents are still SCANNINE ccoonocccnnnnnnonoonnnnnononanonononnnnnnnonannnnn conos 131 Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to MeMOTY cccoococcncconooonnnnnnnonononanononananonos 132 Understanding fax OPO
283. nd lighting conditions For recommendations on how the printer color sample pages may be useful in solving certain color matching problems see the question How can match a particular color such as a corporate logo The printed page appears tinted Can I adjust the color Sometimes a printed page may appear tinted for example everything printed seems to be too red This can be caused by environmental conditions paper type lighting conditions or user preference In these instances adjust the Color Balance setting to create a more preferable color Color Balance provides the user with the ability to make subtle adjustments to the amount of toner being used in each color plane Selecting positive or negative values for cyan magenta yellow and black from the Color Balance menu will slightly increase or decrease the amount of toner used for the chosen color For example if a printed page has a red tint then decreasing both magenta and yellow could potentially improve the color balance Troubleshooting 316 My color transparencies seem dark when they are projected Is there anything can do to improve the color This problem most commonly occurs when projecting transparencies with reflective overhead projectors To obtain the highest projected color quality transmissive overhead projectors are recommended If a reflective projector must be used then adjusting the Toner Darkness setting to 1 2 or 3 willlighten the transparency Make
284. nd the copy mimics the original exactly Paper Saver Off 2 on 1 Portrait 2 on 1 Landscape 4 on 1 Portrait 4 on 1 Landscape Allows copying two or four sheets of a document on one page Note Off is the factory default setting Print Page Borders Off On Specifies whether or not a border is printed around the edge of the page Note Off is the factory default setting Collate On 1 2 1 2 1 2 Off 1 1 1 2 2 2 Keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies Note On is the factory default setting Punch Determines the type of hole punch finishing to be used in a print or copy job Off Note Off is the factory default setting 2 holes 3 holes 4 holes Staple Lets you enable or disable the staple finisher Off Notes On Off is the factory default setting This menu only appears when a staple finisher is installed Understanding printer menus a Menu item Original Size Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Universal 4x 6in 3x5 in Business Card 1D Card Custom Scan Size x A4 190 Description Specifies the paper size of the original document Notes Letter is the US factory default setting A4 isthe international factory default setting AS Oficio Mexico JIS BA JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes Copy To Source Specifies the paper source for copy jobs Tray x Note Tray 1 is the factory default setti
285. nderstanding FTP OptiOns o ccn eren neenon ooa ee ener a o a noe ge nae a aa Saen a ob aene sean ees 138 TP assetto eire te E ete roa bosse eie tuae evel genes NUEVE RI A oe ON 138 File Name ese ssec e EHI e d Eie etse e IE PES dra bed RE Es 138 Original a adios 138 A O UR RR MR 138 Cold A atum Ine nOn i heit stets 139 Resol tion vit ER T EE E RTI e E TE EIE EN Ee Ue eedem dieses 139 DENR SMS NOCTIUM s 139 AERIS 139 Contente ELE adia 139 Scan Preview ose ee Ae e eee de oe d Rm 140 Advanced Options Ree ee eie ehe 140 Contents 8 Scanning to a computer or flash Crive ccsccsscsscsscsscssccscssccsccsccesceees LAL Scanning to a COmpUter s eere retro APNE EE euo ena go EE EE A E FERE QUEE SY ES ani 141 Scanning toa flash drive nicer eee ER aD e EUR ITA RE ee vt Neqde pe i iede 142 Understanding the Scan Center f atures ccccscssssssssscecceceeceecsnsnsaeeceeceececeeeessesssssssausaeeeeeeeseeesesesesens 142 Using the ScanBack Utility sirosis sonarer enneunen epe ane eii naasa nono reres ru rit eidir esaun saine 142 Understanding scan profile options cesses eene ene nennen neni sese nnne nens 143 OriginaliSize 3 hat a ee AR duet ud dne 143 ace aA aat 143 COLON sce Suz ETE 143 COMO me E 143 DELSA E ii PP
286. ng Auto Size Match Manual Feeder Transparency Separators On Off Places a sheet of paper between transparencies Note On is the factory default setting Separator Sheets None Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages Places a sheet of paper between pages copies or jobs Note None is the factory default setting Separator Sheet Source Tray x Manual Feeder Specifies the separator sheet source Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Darkness Specifies the level of darkness for the copy job 1 9 Note 5 is the factory default setting Output Bin Specifies the exit bin to be used for the copy job Standard Bin Notes Bin x Standard Bin is the factory default setting Bin x only appears when at least one optional exit bin is installed Understanding printer menus z Menu item Number of Copies Specifies the number of copies for the copy job 191 Description Page number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Custom text 1 999 Note 1 is the factory default setting Header Footer Specifies header footer information for the top left of the page Top left Notes Top left Off Off is the factory default setting for Top left Date Time All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Header Footer Top middle Top middle Off Date Time Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only
287. ng you quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the home screen For example you can print the latest version of a form exactly when you need it This eliminates inventories of printed forms that can easily become outdated Note The printer must have permission to access the network folder FTP site or Web site where the bookmark is stored From the computer where the bookmark is stored use sharing security and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access For help see the documentation that came with your operating system To configure Forms and Favorites do the following 1 From the Embedded Web Server click Settings gt Device Solutions gt Solutions eSF gt Forms and Favorites 2 Define the bookmarks and then customize the settings 3 Click Apply To use the application touch Forms and Favorites on the home screen and then navigate through form categories or search for forms based on a form number name or description Scan to Network mp CA Icon M Description The application lets you capture a digital image of a hard copy document and routeitto a shared network folder Immediately upon delivery the file is available to anyone permitted to access the folder You can define up to 30 unique folder destinations Notes The printer must have permission to write to the destinations From the computer where the destination is specified use sharing sec
288. nner glass under the ADF door 6 Close the bottom ADF door 7 Close the scanner cover Cleaning the ADF parts Clean the ADF parts periodically to maintain optimal printing performance Residue on the ADF parts may cause print quality issues and false 280 299 paper jam messages 1 Turn the printer off 2 Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth with water 3 Open the ADF cover Maintaining the printer 243 4 Remove the pick roller assembly 5 Wipe the surface of both pick rollers 6 Replace the pick roller assembly 7 Wipe the entire surface under the ADF cover 8 Close the ADF cover Maintaining the printer 244 Cleaning the printhead lenses Clean the printhead lenses when you encounter print quality problems 1 Open the front door 2 Remove all print cartridges Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the shiny area on the photoconductor drum Doing so can damage the photoconductor 3 Locate the four printhead lenses 4 Clean the lenses using compressed air Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the printhead lenses 5 Reinstall the print cartridges Maintaining the printer 245 6 Close the front door Storing supplies Choose a cool clean storage area for the printer supplies Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you are ready to use them Do not expose supplies to Direct sunlight Temperatures above 35 C 95 F High humidity a
289. noncnnno 305 A e a e aa aiaa aa iaa eraa paaa aaa deee a aR a aa ae inaaianei iadaaa 306 Printirregularities AA AEE EE a E AE E A S Ee o er d 306 Printistoo dark oet A A E ERE RH 307 Print is reeM ncm E 308 Printeris printing blank pages E Ra eee 309 Repeating defects appear ON PROS uote RE Eee tec t ce PORT de ide A a ied ded 309 Skewed u ar 310 Solid color or black pages appear on printS cconnococcccnonoccnnnonanonnnnnnnnnnnononononnnnonnnno no nnncnnnnnn nn innen nnn enne nnn 310 Black or white streaks appear on transparencies or paper ccconocoocnccccnooonnnnnnnonannnnnnnonononnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnoonnnnncnnnnn 311 Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints eee enne nennen nnne nennen rennen enn n nnns 311 Streaked Vertical a E ERE EE EIER ES 312 Toner fog or background shading appears on a PAaBe u ceessccccesssssecescsesseececessesneececesseeesessseseeecesessseaeeaeesens 312 Toner rubs OTs dele 3 oz 313 A LEER 314 Transparency print quality is pOOr a cedet bens ies da vede ala e 314 Contents 15 Uneven print density s Se oie he stone stats eee stad ein sitet chen bed i Ee EE ee RR ege dead 314 Solving color quality problems miii id e nee eed kane e e Duae eden ae Due adas 315 FAQ about color printing itte A A eode doe dedi 315 Embedded Web Server does not Open ccccccecessesessesesesnsnseeceececeseeseseesesesensn
290. ns Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer Preprinting introduces semi liquid and volatile components into the printer Use grain short card stock when possible Printing confidential and other held jobs Storing print jobs in the printer You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer control panel All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs Note Confidential Verify Reserve and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs Printing 99 Print job type Description Confidential Confidential lets you hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the control panel Note The PIN is set from the computer It must be four digits using the numbers 0 9 Verify Verify lets you print one copy of a print job while the printer holds the remaining copies It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfactory The print job is automatically deleted from the printer memory once all copies are printed Reserve Reserve allows the printer to store print jobs for printing at a later time The print jobs are held until deleted from the Help Jobs menu Repeat Repeat prints and stores print jobs in the printer memory for reprinting M Printing confidential and other held jobs
291. nsients are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources This has been identified as a major nationwide problem It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated and certified by UL Underwriter s Laboratories another NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory or a recognized safety certification body in the country region of use This isto avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device including fax machines to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the date and time itis sent and an identification of the business or other entity or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business other entity or individual The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long distance transmission charges See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network This product meets the applicable
292. nt may not apply to you This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in later editions Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described may be made at any time References in this publication to products programs or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make these available in all countries in which it operates Any reference to a product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only that product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products programs or services except those expressly designated by the manufacturer are the user s responsibility For Lexmark technical support visit support lexmark com For information on supplies and downloads visit www lexmark com If you don t have access to the Internet you can contact Lexmark by mail Lexmark International Inc Bldg 004 2 CSC 740 New Circle Road NW Lexington KY 40550 USA 2010 Lexmark International Inc All rights reserved Notices 320 UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RIGHTS This software and any accompanying documentation provided under this agreement are commercial computer software and docume
293. ntation developed exclusively at private expense Trademarks Lexmark Lexmark with diamond design MarkNet and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International Inc registered in the United States and or other countries PrintCryption and ScanBack are trademarks of Lexmark International Inc Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett Packard Company PCL is Hewlett Packard Company s designation of a set of printer commands language and functions included in its printer products This printer is intended to be compatible with the PCL language This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application programs and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies Albertus The Monotype Corporation plc Antique Olive Monsieur Marcel OLIVE Apple Chancery Apple Computer Inc Arial The Monotype Corporation plc CG Times Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc is a product of Agfa Corporation Chicago Apple Computer Inc Clarendon Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Eurostile Nebiolo Geneva Apple Computer Inc GillSans The Monotype Corporation plc Helvetica Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Hoefler Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry
294. nter is an analog device that works best when directly connected to the telephone wall outlet Other devices such as a telephone or answering machine can be successfully attached to pass through the printer as described in the setup steps f you want a digital connection such as ISDN DSL or ADSL then a third party device such as a DSL filter is required Contact your DSL provider for a DSL filter The DSL filter removes the digital signal on the telephone line that can interfere with the ability of the printer to fax properly You do not need to attach the printer to a computer but you do need to connect it to an analog telephone line to send and receive faxes Equipment and service options Fax connection setup Connect directly to the telephone line See Connecting to an analog telephone line on page 123 Connect to a Digital Subscriber Line DSL or ADSL service See Connecting to a DSL service on page 124 Connect to a Private Branch eXchange PBX or Integrated See Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system on page 124 Services Digital Network ISDN system Use a Distinctive Ring service See Connecting to a distinctive ring service on page 125 Connect through an adapter used in your area See Connecting to an adapter for your country or region on page 125 LU y Connecting to an analog telephone line If your telecommunications equipment uses a US style RJ11 telephone
295. nter or print server Troubleshooting 281 55 Unsupported option in slot x 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer system board and then replace it with a supported card 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on 56 Parallel port x disabled Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the parallel port Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled 56 Serial port x disabled Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the serial port Mlake sure the Serial Buffer menu is not set to Disabled 56 Standard USB port disabled Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the USB port Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled 56 Standard parallel port disabled Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the parallel port Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled 56 USB port x disabled Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the USB po
296. ntrol panel to return to the originating screen after the deletion process is completed Do Not Delete sets the printer control panel to return to the main Utilities menu Activate Hex Trace Assists in isolating the source of a print job problem Notes When activated all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation and control codes are not executed To exit or deactivate Hex Trace turn the printer off or reset the printer Coverage Estimator Provides an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page The estimate is Off printed on a separate page at the end of each print job On Note Off is the factory default setting NS XPS menu Menu item Description Print Error Pages Prints a page containing information on errors including XML markup errors Off Note Off is the factory default setting On PDF menu Menu item Description Scale to Fit Scales page content to fit the selected paper size No Yes Note No is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 231 Menu item Description Annotations Prints annotations in a PDF Do Not Print Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Print PostScript menu Menu item Description Print PS Error Prints a page containing the PostScript error Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Lock PS Startup Mode Enables users to disable the SysStart f
297. nu item applies to all scan functions Transmission Log Print log Do not print log Print only for error Specifies whether the transmission log prints Note Print log is the factory default setting Log Paper Source Tray x Manual Feeder Specifies a paper source for FTP logs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Log Output Bin Specifies an exit bin for FTP logs Standard Bin Notes Bin x Standard Bin is the factory default setting Bin x only appears when at least one optional exit bin is installed FTP bit Depth Enables the Text Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images when 8 bit Color is set to Off 1 bit Note 8 bit is the factory default setting Base File Name Lets you enter a base file name Note There is an image limitation of 53 characters Custom Job Scanning Off On Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus Menu item Scan Preview Off On 214 Description Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Allow Save as Shortcut On Off Enables shortcut creation for FTP addresses Note On is the factory default setting Background Removal 4 to 4 Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting C
298. numbers touch Next number and then enter the next fax number Navigate to gt enter a name for the shortcut gt Done gt OK gt Fax It Sending a fax Sending a fax using the touch screen 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen touch Fax Enter the fax number or a shortcut using the touch screen or keypad To add recipients touch Next Number and then enter the recipient s telephone number or shortcut number or search the address book Note To place a dial pause within a fax number press aD The dial pause appears as a comma in the Fax to box Use this feature if you need to dial an outside line first Touch Fax It Sending a fax using the computer The printer driver fax option allows you to print to fax where the printer will send a queued document as a fax rather than print it The fax option functions as a normal fax machine but is controlled through the printer driver instead of the printer control panel 1 With a document open click File gt Print 2 Select the printer and then navigate to Properties gt Fax tab gt Enable fax 3 Enter the recipient fa
299. o a single copy job Each set may be scanned using different job parameters When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled the scanner scans the first set of original documents using the supplied parameters and then it scans the next set with the same or different parameters The definition of a set depends on the scan source f you scan a document on the scanner glass then a set consists of one page f you scan multiple pages using the ADF then a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF becomes empty f you scan one page using the ADF then a set consists of one page For example 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Options gt Custom Job gt On gt Done gt Copy It When the end of a set is reached the scan screen appears Copying 109 4 Load the next document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass and then touch Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed Note If required change the job settings 5 f you have another document to scan then repeat the previous step Otherwise touch Finish the job
300. o ces dese ere Eee Te Pad co evene ed ob a ee eed Pe aa ern e espe lobe pee en aae epa eta prevede 109 Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF esses nnne ennemi nnns 109 Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass ccconooccccncnooooonnnnnnnannonnnnnnonnnnoncnononnnos 110 Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed sessi 110 Understanding the copy screens and OPTIONS ceseccccecsseseceeseneceeceecenaeecesceueececeeeaaeeceeseseeeseesennes 110 COPY TOM 110 Soo AE o PAE E 110 Xe iii A O O A A A A T 110 RR M S 111 DEISE EET CODICI a E s 111 Sides Duplex eiie tete e utetur e de eet I TUS 111 erue HP 111 Content eee a ERAS NR ERE ERREUR 111 nlg e PP rere 112 Advanced Opt iii abla 112 SaVOVAS OM CU rS 113 EMANAN A AAA Ariana A Getting ready to esmalte a a terri ee e tz adir ena ted Ii 114 Setting up the e mail f nctionzsss ee eei ete ee atate Weds ded eee rettet cedes idet eee aid 114 Configuring e mail SCULINGS eere tette ehe tre erae ETUR eae re ne ene dno EALE RANEE 114 Creating an e mail Shortcut eere terere eerie iod a Page na e deseas d ea aiias 115 Creating an e mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
301. o not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings General Settings 3 In the Screen Brightness field enter the brightness percentage you want for the display 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings 2 Touch the arrows until Screen Brightness appears and then select a setting 3 Touch Submit Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 72 Setting the standard exit bin light To save energy you can dim or turn off the output lighting for the standard exit bin Available settings are Off Dim and Bright The factory default setting for Normal Standby Mode is Bright When Eco Mode is set to Energy or Energy Paper then the light setting is Dim When in Sleep Mode then the light is off Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Output Lighting 3 From
302. ob data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file system All permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved such as downloaded fonts macros and held jobs Note This menu appears only when a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed Menu item Description Wiping Mode Specifies the mode for disk wiping Auto Note Auto is the factory default setting The printer determines when to initiate a Manual disk wipe Off Scheduled Wiping Sets the schedule for disk wiping Time Notes Day Time is used to set the time for scheduled wiping Day is used to set the specific day or period for scheduled wiping Values are Sunday to Friday Everyday Weekdays and Weekends Scheduled wipes are initiated without displaying a user warning or confirmation message Both manual and scheduled wiping allow the file system to reuse marked disk space without first having to wipe it Understanding printer menus Menu item Manual Wiping Do not start now Start now 177 Description Overwrites all disk space that has been used to hold data from a print job that has been processed printed This type of wipe does not erase any information related to an unprocessed print job Notes Do not start now is the factory default setting Ifthe Disk Wiping access control is activated then a user must successfully authenticate and have the required authorization in order to initi
303. ocument was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Fax Resolution Standard Fine 200 dpi Super Fine 300 dpi Ultra Fine 600 dpi Specifies the resolution level for scan to fax Darkness Lightens or darkens the output 1 9 Note 5 factory default setting Orientation Specifies the orientation of the scanned image Portrait Landscape Understanding printer menus Menu item Original Size Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Universal 4x 6in 3x5 in Business Card Custom Scan Size x A4 AS Oficio Mexico JIS B4 JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes 205 Description Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned Note Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Use Multi Page TIFF On Off Provides a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to fax job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Notes On is the factory default setting This menu item applies to all scan functions Enable Analog Receive Off On Enables analog fax receive Note Off is the factory default setting E mail Settings menu Menu item E mail Server Setup Subject Message Base file name Description Specifies e mail server information Notes The subje
304. og in to the SMTP server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected Security menu Editing Security Setups menu Menu item Edit Backup Password Note This menu item will only appear if a backup password exists Description Creates a backup password Edit Building Blocks Edits the Internal Accounts NTLM various Setups Password and PIN Edit Security Templates Adds or edits a Security Template Edit Access Controls Controls access to printer menus firmware updates held jobs and other access points Understanding printer menus 175 Miscellaneous Security Settings menu Menu item Login Restrictions Login failures Failure time frame Lockout time Panel Login Timeout Remote Login Timeout Description Limits the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control panel before all users are locked out Notes Login failures specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are locked out Settings range from 1 10 attempts is the factory default setting Failure time frame specifies the time frame during which failed login attempts can be made before users are locked out Settings range from 1 60 minutes 5 minutes is the factory default setting Lockout time specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the login failures limit Settings range from 1 60 minutes 5 minutes is the factory default setting lindicates
305. oing to scan When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes letter and legal size pages Resolution This option adjusts the output quality of your file Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size Color This option enables or disables color for the scanned image Content This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document Choose content type from Text Text Photo Photo or Graphics Text Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphics Use when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Text Photo Use when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Photo Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image Choose content source from Color Laser Black White Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press or Other Color Laser Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Laser Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer Scanning to a computer or flash drive 144 Inkjet Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer Photo Film Use when the original document is a photo from
306. olding bars Haveaninterlocking design Have postage stamps attached Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position Have bent corners Have rough cockle or laid finishes Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes Note A combination of high humidity over 6096 and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes Tips on using labels Print samples on the labels being considered for use before buying large quantities Note Paper labels are supported Other media such as vinyl may show print quality defects in some environments and prolonged vinyl label usage may reduce fuser life For detailed information on label printing characteristics and design see the Card Stock amp Label Guide available on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Printing 98 When printing on labels Use labels designed specifically for laser printers Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that The labels can withstand temperatures up to 190 C 374 F without sealing excessive curling wrinkling or releasing hazardous emissions Label adhesives face sheet printable stock and topcoats can withstand up to 25 psi 172 kPa pressure without delaminating oozing around the edges or releasing hazardous fumes Do not use labels with slick backing material Use full label sheets Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during pr
307. olor Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Enables an equal balance of colors in the output Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Specifies which color to drop during scanning and how much to increase or decrease the dropout Notes None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Contrast 0 5 Best for content Specifies the contrast of the output Note Best for content is the factory default setting Mirror Image Off On Creates a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Negative Image Creates a negative image of the original document Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Shadow Detail Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image 4 to 4 Note 0 is the factory default setting ADF Skew Fix Specifies whether or not to fix slight skew on the scanned image off Note Off is the factory default setting On Scan edge to edge Off On Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge to edge Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 215 Menu item Description Sharpness Adjusts the amount of sharpness of a scanned image 1 5 Note 3 is the factory default setting Temperature
308. ometimes result from changeable conditions such as room temperature and humidity Color adjustments are made on printer algorithms Color alignment is also recalibrated in this process s y Utilities menu Menu item Description Remove Held Jobs Removes confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk Confidential Notes Held Not Restored Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer Al Bookmarks print jobs on flash drives and other types of held jobs are not affected Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the printer hard disk or memory x y Understanding printer menus Menu item Format Flash Yes No 230 Description Formats the flash memory Warning Potential Damage Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is being formatted Notes Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory Nocancels the format request Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory option card in the printer Aflash memory option card must be installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be available The flash memory option card must not be read write or write protected Delete Downloads on Disk Delete Now Do Not Delete Removes downloads from the printer hard disk including all held jobs buffered jobs and parked jobs Notes Delete Now configures the printer co
309. on 57 installation using Macintosh 60 installation using Windows 58 wireless network setup in Windows 58 wireless printer setup in Macintosh 60 WS Scan 31 X XPS menu 230
310. onal Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower III 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE EL ES FI FR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MT NL NO PL PT RO SE SI SK TR UK esky Spole nost Lexmark International Inc t mto prohla uje e v robek tento v robek je ve shod se z kladn mi po adavky a dal mi p slu n mi ustanoven mi sm rnice 1999 5 ES Dansk Lexmark International Inc erkl rer herved at dette produkt overholder de v sentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Notices 331 Deutsch Hiermit erklart Lexmark International Inc dass sich das Ger t dieses Ger t in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschlagigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999 5 EG befindet EMnvikA ME THN MAPOY2A H LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL INC AHAQNEI OTI AYTO TO NPOION YMMOPQOONETAI MPO2 TIZ OYZIOAEIZ ATIAITHXEIX KAI TIZ AOINE2 ZXETIKE2Z AIATA EI2 TH OAHTIA2 1999 5 EK English Hereby Lexmark International Inc declares that this
311. oner cartridge Black Cartridge Early Warning Invalid Critically Low Missing Defective OK Unsupported Shows the status of the black toner cartridge OK Replace Separator Pick Assembly and Roller Shows the status of the separator pick assembly and roller Understanding printer menus 147 Menu item Description Waste Toner Bottle Shows the status of the waste toner bottle Near Full Replace Missing OK Fuser Shows the status of the fuser Early Warning Low Replace Missing OK Transfer Module Shows the status of the transfer module Early Warning Low Replace Missing OK Staple Cartridge Shows the status of the staple cartridge Early Warning Low Replace Missing OK Hole Punch Box Shows the status of the hole punch box Near Full Replace Missing OK Understanding printer menus Paper menu Default Source menu Menu item Default Source Tray x MP Feeder Manual Paper Manual Envelope 148 Description Sets a default paper source for all print jobs Notes Tray 1 standard tray is the factory default setting From the Paper menu Configure MP feeder must be set to Cassette for MP feeder to appear as a menu setting e If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and Paper Type settings match then the trays are automatically linked When one tray is empty the print job continues using the linked tray y Pape
312. onfiguration menus the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 240 minutes Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption but may increase the response time of the product Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response but uses more energy Off mode If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power then to completely stop product power consumption disconnect the power supply cord from the wall outlet Total energy usage It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage Since power consumption claims are provided in power units of Watts the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in order to calculate energy usage The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode s energy usage Notices 325 Industry Canada compliance statement This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Standard ICES 003 Avis de conformit aux normes de l industrie du Canada Cet appareil num rique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux quipements pouvant causer des interf rences NMB 003 European Community EC directives conformity This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 1999 5 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the la
313. only if a non read only printer hard disk is installed This requirement ensures that stored jobs are not deleted if the printer loses power Understanding printer menus Menu item Print Area Normal Fit to Page Whole Page 222 Description Sets the logical and physical printable area Notes Normal is the factory default setting When attempting to print data in the non printable area defined by the Normal setting the printer clips the image at the boundary Fit to Page fits the page content into the selected paper size Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the non printable area defined by the Normal setting but the printer clips the image at the Normal setting boundary This setting affects only pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter and has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL or PostScript interpreter Black Only Mode Off On Sets the printer to print text and graphics using only the black print cartridge Note Off is the factory default setting Download Target RAM Flash Disk Sets the storage location for downloads Notes RAM is the factory default setting Storing downloads in RAM is temporary Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk places them in permanent storage Downloads remain in flash memory or on the printer hard disk even when the printer is turned off This menu item appears only if a flash and or disk option is installed
314. ononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnanononono nono nnnnonnnnnnnos 75 Loading the 2000 sheet high capacity feCCEP c ccccccccccccsssssssssseceeseecesscessseeceeceecessesssensuseseeseseeseeeees 78 Loading the multipurpose FEECEL ccccscccceceecssssssseeceeecessesssnsseeeseecesscesuseeessaeeesesesscesssaususeseeeseseeseeseees 80 Linking ANG unliriKing trays necesite eerte n ee eo neret eco e eee en sooo rne E bane RE Ere ead gen 82 WINKS tray idR IR IR dee 82 BORD ACCURRIT endi a 83 LINKING OXI DIN nerit rette te nd el gates abia ad 83 Creating a custom name for a paper type cccceesssscceceessssceecescsesseececesesssseseessssececeseasaueeeecesssaseeeseeseseaeaeeees 83 Assigning a custom paper type name ccsssssessnnnsneeeeceeccececeeesceesseeseeseeeeseaeeaseceeseesseseeeeeeaeusaaaeaseaaaaaaaeeeeeees 84 CONTIBUTING a CUSTOM nales ze did 84 Contents 4 Paper and specialty media Quidelines ccscccsccsccssccsccesccsscesccnscescessesOD Paper guidelines n rtr er Fes E Ai 85 Paper Characteristics dioe o req e dep euo cO Ru E Ee A e EORR e adque e sat 85 Selecting Paper A ends dne um 86 Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead sss nennen nennen nennen een n nnne 86 Using recycled paper and other office papers sss eene enne enne nennen nnns ener enne nnne 86 Storing paper iii A A da qu A AAA 88 Supported paper sizes types and WeightS
315. ons are not set up sseni iaei a a e ea ia a kaseto raai ie iiaa 294 Contents 14 Caller ID iS Ot SHOWM iis us oett rtt at 294 Cannot sendor receive a fax edet eee A aia 295 Can send but not receive TAXCS i there rin erre Rie ecd a RD RER SNR tesa aaa iae iaaa 296 Carni receive but not send TAXES 5 5 3 otto tae te eterne mee eate er ede e deed venter endete leere 297 Received fax has poor print quality esses enne nnn nnnnnn inse nne nono rennen nnn nennen 297 Solving home screen applications problems cesses eene nnne ene enne nasse nnns 298 An application error has occurred cccsscccccessssssececeessassecescesueececcsseaeecescessseesscsesaaeeeeceseaseaeeesesseseaaaaeseseeees 298 Solving option problems n eter eee et tne exero reo eua EE TY eene ee de ehe aee ea ERARE Ea Ce eee RN eR e Ra iE ise 299 Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed oooonnoccccnnonooonncononanannnnnnonanononcnonanononos 299 Papertray problems iss iria bete eie eia in im ite tuse ee ries 299 2 O00 sheet drawer problems eet ev dnt onem e ers 300 Cannot detect flash memory card esses eene nennen nnn nenenn sss e nne ten sense nne sensn seen nnns 300 Cannot detect printer hard disk ce et n ect RO es SES 300 Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly cccoooooccncnnoocnnnnnnononnnnnnnonaonnnoncnnnnnnnnncnncnnnnnnnnnornnnnnnnnnnns 300 Internal print server do
316. ontent is the factory default setting 5 reduces the file size and quality of the image 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large This menu item applies to all scan functions Text Default 5 90 Sets the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image Note 75 is the factory default setting Text Photo Default 5 90 Sets the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 75 is the factory default setting Photo Default 5 90 Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 50 is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus Menu item E mail images sent as Attachment Web Link 209 Description Specifies how the images will be sent Note Attachment is the factory default setting Use Multi Page TIFF On Off Provides a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to e mail job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Notes e Onis the factory default setting This menu item applies to all scan functions Transmission Log Print log Do not print log Print only for error Specifies whether or not the transmission log prints Note Print log is the factory default se
317. ontinue to clear the message and continue printing Troubleshooting 284 80 xx Replace fuser Replace the fuser using the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 80 xx Fuser missing 1 Replace the fuser following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 82 xx Replace waste toner bottle 1 Replace the waste toner bottle For instructions on replacing the waste toner bottle from the printer control panel touch More Information 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 82 xx Waste toner bottle missing Reinsert the waste toner bottle into the printer 82 xx Waste toner bottle nearly full Order a replacement waste toner bottle immediately 1 Replace the waste toner bottle For instructions on installing the waste toner bottle from the printer control panel touch More Information 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 83 xx Replace transfer module Replace the transfer module following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 83 xx Transfer module life warning 1 Replace the transfer module following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 83 xx Transfer module missing Insert the transfer module into the printer 88 xx color cartridge nearly low Order a replacement for the specif
318. or cartridge nearly low appears order a new cartridge Estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO IEC 19798 standard Extremely low print coverage less than 1 25 for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield and may cause cartridge parts to fail prior to exhaustion of toner Recommended print cartridge and part number Lexmark Return Program Cartridge Regular cartridge Cyan Print Cartridge C792A1CG C792A2CG Cyan Extra High Yield Print Cartridge C792X1CG C792X2CG Magenta Print Cartridge C792A1MG C792A2MG Magenta Extra High Yield Print Cartridge C792X1MG C792X2MG Yellow Print Cartridge C792A1YG C792A2YG Yellow Extra High Yield Print Cartridge C792X1YG C792X2YG Black Print Cartridge C792A1KG C792A2KG Black Extra High Yield Print Cartridge C792X1KG C792X2KG J Ordering a fuser or a transfer module When 80 Fuser Life Warning or 83 Transfer Module Life Warning appears order a replacement fuser or a transfer module When 80 Replace Fuseror83 Replace Transfer Module appears install the new fuser or the new transfer module For installation information see the documentation that came with the part Part number Fuser 40X7102 100 volts 40X7100 115 volts 40X7101 230 volts Transfer Module 40X7103 Maintaining the printer 247 Ordering a waste toner bottle When 82 Waste toner bottle nearly full appears order a replacement waste toner bottle When 82 Replac
319. ords and cables from the printer before moving it Lift the printer off of the optional drawer and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same time Note Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer Warning Potential Damage Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty Maintaining the printer 253 Moving the printer to another location The printer and options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer Any cart used to move the options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the options Keep the printer in an upright position Avoid severe jarring movements Shipping the printer When shipping the printer use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit Administrative support 254 Administrative support Finding advanced networking and administrator information This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server For more advanced system support tasks see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD and the Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Using the Embedded Web Server If the printer is installed on a network the
320. orted flash drives 96 supported paper sizes 88 supported paper types and weights 90 system board accessing 35 system board cover attaching 35 reattaching 35 I TCP IP menu 164 telecommunication notices 325 326 327 328 tips card stock 98 labels paper 97 on using envelopes 97 on using letterhead 96 on using transparencies 97 tips on using envelopes 97 tips on using letterhead 96 toner cartridges recycling 73 toner darkness adjusting 93 touch screen buttons 25 transparencies copying on 103 loading 97 loading in multipurpose feeder 80 tips on using 97 using 97 346 Tray x paper size unsupported 278 tray linking assigning a custom paper type name 84 tray unlinking assigning a custom paper type name 84 trays linking 82 unlinking 83 troubleshooting an application error has occurred 298 cannot open Embedded Web Server 318 checking an unresponsive printer 269 checking an unresponsive scanner 292 contacting customer support 318 FAQ about color printing 315 fax and e mail functions are not set up 294 Scan to Network 298 solving basic printer problems 269 troubleshooting copy copier does not respond 289 partial document or photo copies 291 poor copy quality 290 poor scanned image quality 293 scanner unit does not close 290 troubleshooting display display is blank 286 display shows only diamonds 286 troubleshooting fax caller ID is not shown 294 can receive but not send faxes 297 can
321. ortrait and left edge for landscape Paper Saver Orientation Auto Landscape Portrait Specifies the orientation of a multiple page document Note Auto is the factory default setting The printer chooses between portrait and landscape Paper Saver Off 2 Up 3 Up 4 Up 6 Up 9 Up 12 Up 16 Up Specifies that multiple page images be printed on one side of a paper Notes e Off is the factory default setting The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side Paper Saver Border None Solid Prints a border around each page image Note None is the factory default setting Paper Saver Ordering Horizontal Reverse Horizontal Reverse Vertical Vertical Specifies the positioning of multiple page images Notes Horizontal is the factory default setting Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation 221 Understanding printer menus r Separator Sheets Off Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages Specifies whether blank separator sheets are inserted Notes e Off is the factory default setting Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to On If Collate is set to Off then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages such as after all page 1 s and after all page 2 s Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs
322. orts the performance specifications for your printer On configures the printer to produce as little noise as possible This setting is best suited for printing text and line graphics For optimal printing of color rich documents set Quiet Mode to Off Selecting Photo from the driver may disable Quiet Mode and provide better print quality and full speed printing Run Initial setup Instructs the printer to run the setup wizard Yes Notes No Yes is the factory default setting After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the Country select screen the default becomes No Understanding printer menus z Menu item Keyboard Keyboard Type English Francais Francais Canadien Deutsch Italiano Espanol Greek Dansk Norsk Nederlands Svenska Suomi Portuguese Russian Polski Swiss German Swiss French Korean Magyar Turkish Czech Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Japanese Custom Key x 181 Description Specifies a language and custom key information for the printer control panel keyboard The additional tabs enable access to accent marks and symbols from the printer control panel keyboard Paper Sizes US Metric Notes US is the factory default setting Initial setting is determined by your country or region selection in the initial setup wizard Changing this setting also changes the default for each input source in the Paper Size Paper Type menu Scan to
323. ot know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section E mailing 115 2 Click Settings gt E mail FTP Settings gt E mail Settings 3 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information 4 Click Submit Creating an e mail shortcut Creating an e mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Under Other Settings click Manage Shortcuts E mail Shortcut Setup 4 Type a unique name for the recipient and then enter the e mail address Note If you are entering multiple addresses then separate each address with a comma 5 Select the scan settings Format Content Color and Resolution 6 Enter a shortcut number and then click Add If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number Creating an e mail shortcut using the touch screen 1 From the home screen navigate to E mail Recipient type an e mail address To create a gr
324. otely using a web browser No Note Yes is the factory default setting WINS Server Address Lets you view or change the current WINS server address Enable DDNS Lets you view or change the current DDNS setting Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No Enable mDNS Lets you view or change the current mDNS setting Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No DNS Server Address Lets you view or change the current DNS server address Enable HTTPS Lets you view or change the current HTTPS setting Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No IPv6 menu This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network x gt Standard Network Setup or Network x Setup gt IPv6 Note This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers Menu item Description Enable IPv6 Enables IPv6 in the printer On Note On is the factory default setting Off Auto Configuration Specifies whether the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6 On address configuration entries provided by a router Off Note On is the factory default setting Set Hostname Lets you set the hostname View Address Note These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server View Router Address Enable DHCPv6 Enables DHCPv6 in the printer On Note On is the factory default setting Off Understanding printer menus 166 Wireless menu Use the following menu items to v
325. ou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax gt enter the fax number gt Options 4 From the Resolution area touch the arrows to change to the resolution you want 5 Touch Fax It Making a fax lighter or darker 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax gt enter the fax number gt Options 4 From the Darkness area touch the arrows to adjust the darkness of the fax 5 Touch Fax It Sending a fax at a scheduled time 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax enter the fax number Options Advanced Options Delayed Send Note If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server the Delayed Send button will not appear Faxes waiting for transmission are listed in the Fax Queue
326. ou view the NTP Server Address Enable Authentication Off On Lets you change the authentication setting to on or off Note Off is the factory default setting Settings menu General Settings menu Menu item Display Language English Francais Deutsch Italiano Espanol Greek Dansk Norsk Nederlands Svenska Portuguese Suomi Russian Polski Magyar Turkce Cesky Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean Japanese Description Sets the language of the text appearing on the display Note All languages may not be available for all printers a Menu item Description Understanding printer menus 180 Eco Mode Minimizes the use of energy paper or specialty media off Notes Energy Energy Paper e Off is the factory default setting Off resets the printer to its factory default settings Paper Energy minimizes the power used by the printer Performance may be affected but print quality is not Energy Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and specialty media Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media needed for a print job Performance may be affected but print quality is not ADF Loaded Beep Specifies whether the ADF sounds a beep when paper is loaded Enabled Note Enabled is the factory default setting Disabled Quiet Mode Reduces the amount of noise produced by the printer off Notes On Offisthe factory default setting This setting supp
327. ouch To Accept Save a setting Cancel Cancel an action or a selection e Exita screen and lets you return to the previous screen without saving changes Reset Reset values on the screen Radio button Y x O Select or clear an item Features Feature Menu trail line Menus gt Settings gt Copy Settings gt Number of Copies Description A menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen This feature shows the path taken to arrive at the current menu Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu Number of Copies is not underlined since this is the current screen If you touch an underlined word on the Number of Copies screen before the Number of Copies is set and saved then the selection is not saved and it does not become the default setting Attendance message alert If an attendance message affects a function then this icon appears and the red indicator light blinks Understanding the home screen 28 Feature Description Warning If an error condition occurs then this icon appears A Setting up and using the home screen applications 29 Setting up and using the home screen applications Notes Your home screen icons and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings administrative setup and active embedded applications Some applications are supported only on select printer models There may be
328. oup of recipients touch Next address and then type the next recipient s e mail address 2 Touch 3 Type a unique name for the shortcut and then touch Done 4 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct and then touch OK If the name or number is incorrect then touch Cancel and then reenter the information E E mailing 116 mailing a document Sending an e mail using the touch screen 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides Note Make sure the size of the original document and the copy paper size are the same Failure to set the proper size may result to a cropped image From the home screen navigate to E mail gt Recipient ZTA Enter the e mail address or press and then enter the shortcut number To enter additional recipients touch Next Address and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add Note You can also enter an e mail address using the address book Touch Done gt Send It Sending an e mail using a shortcut number 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items
329. ove the specified bin 1 2 3 4 Turn the printer off Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Remove the specified bin Contact Customer Support Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the specified bin Reattach bin x y Try one or more of the following Turn the printer off and then back on Reattach the specified bins 1 uU bb WN 6 Turn the printer off Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Remove the specified bins Reattach the bins Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet Turn the printer back on Remove the specified bins 1 2 3 4 Turn the printer off Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Remove the specified bins Contact Customer Support Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the specified bins Troubleshooting 277 Remove packaging material area name Remove any remaining packaging material from the specified location Remove paper from standard output bin Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin Remove paper from bin x Remove the paper from the specified bin The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing If removing the paper does not clear the message then touch Continue Remove paper from all bins Output bins have reached their capacity Remove paper from all output bins to clear the message and continue printing Remove pape
330. pdating available options in the printer driver Once the printer software and any options are installed it may be necessary to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs For Windows users 1 Open the printers folder a Click e or click Start and then click Run b Inthe Start Search or Run box type control printers C Press Enter or click OK 2 Select the printer 3 Right click the printer and then select Properties 4 Click the Configuration tab 5 Click Update Now Ask Printer or manually add any installed hardware options under Configuration Options 6 Click Apply For Macintosh users In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later 1 From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences Print amp Fax select your printer Options amp Supplies Driver 2 Add any installed hardware options and then click OK In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier 1 From the Finder navigate to Go Applications Utilities 2 Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center 3 Select your printer 4 From the Printers menu choose Show Info 5 Add any installed hardware options and then click Apply Changes Setting up wireless printing Note A Service Set Identifier SSID is a name assigned to a wireless network Wireless Encryption Protocol WEP and Wi Fi Protected Access WPA are types of security used on a network Information you will need to set up the printer on a wireless netwo
331. pe feeder 273 Install Tray x 273 Load src with custom string 274 Load src with custom type name 274 Load src with size 274 Load src with type size 274 Load Manual Feeder with custom string 275 Load Manual Feeder with custom type name 275 Load Manual Feeder with paper size 275 Load Manual Feeder with paper type paper size 275 Load staples 275 Memory full cannot print faxes 275 Reattach bin x 276 Reattach bin x y 276 Remove packaging material area name 277 Remove paper from all bins 277 Remove paper from bin x 277 Remove paper from standard output bin 277 Restore held jobs 277 Scanner automatic feeder cover open 277 Slide finisher to the left 277 Some held jobs were not restored 277 Supply needed to complete job 277 Tray x paper size unsupported 278 Unsupported disk 278 Unsupported USB device please remove 272 printer options troubleshooting 2 000 sheet drawer problems 300 cannot detect flash memory card 300 cannot detect printer hard disk 300 internal print server 301 Internal Solutions Port 300 memory card 301 Index option does not work 299 paper tray problems 299 USB parallel interface card 301 printer problems solving basic 269 printer software installing 56 printhead lenses cleaning 244 printing black and white 93 canceling from printer control panel 100 directory list 100 font sample list 100 from flash drive 94
332. per Black and White Laser is used when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer Press Other Inkjet is used when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer Black and White Laser Photo Film is used when the original document is a photo from film Magazine is used when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper is used when the original document is from a newspaper Press is used when the original document was printed using a printing press Other is used when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Color Specifies whether or not copies are printed in color On Note On is the factory default setting Off Resolution Specifies the resolution of the scan in dots per inch dpi 150 dpi Note 150 dpi is the factory default setting 200 dpi 300 dpi 400 dpi 600 dpi 75 dpi Darkness Lightens or darkens the output 1 9 Note 5 is the factory default setting Orientation Specifies the orientation of the scanned image Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Understanding printer menus gt Menu item Original Size Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Universal 4x 6in 3x5 in Business Card Custom Scan Size x A4 217 Description Specifies the paper size of the original document setting Note Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default AS Oficio Mexico A6
333. porarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing Notes e Off is the factory default setting On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Advanced Status On Enables bidirectional communication through the parallel port Notes Off Onisthe factory default setting Off disables parallel port negotiation Protocol Specifies the parallel port protocol Fastbytes Notes Standard Fastbytes is the factory default setting It provides compatibility with most existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting Standard tries to resolve parallel port communication problems Honor Init Determines if the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests from the Off computer On Notes e Off is the factory default setting The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the parallel port Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the computer is turned on Parallel Mode 2 On Off Determines if the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of a strobe Note On is the factory default setting Mac Binary PS Auto Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print
334. printed pages are offset such as all page 1 s and all page 2 s Between Jobs sets the same offset position for the entire print job regardless of the number of copies printed This menu appears only when a stapler is installed Quality menu Menu item Print Mode Color Black Only Description Specifies whether images are printed in color or in black and white Note Color is the factory default setting Color Correction Auto Off Manual Adjusts the color output on the printed page Notes Auto is the factory default setting Auto applies different color conversion tables to each object on the printed page Off turns off color correction Manual allows customization of the color tables using the settings available from the Manual Color menu Due to the differences in additive and subtractive colors certain colors that appear on computer monitors are impossible to duplicate on the printed page Print Resolution 4800 CQ 1200 dpi Specifies the printed output resolution Note 4800 CQ is the factory default setting Toner Darkness 1 5 r Lightens or darkens the printed output Notes Ais the factory default setting Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner f Print Mode is set to Black Only then a setting of 5 increases toner density and darkness to all print jobs f Print Mode is set to Color then a setting of 5 is the same as a setting of 4
335. printhead lenses 244 Close tray door 271 Close finisher side door 271 Close finisher top cover 271 Close front door 271 Close left side door 271 Close paper transport cover 270 Close top access cover 271 collating copies 107 confidential print jobs 98 printing from a Macintosh computer 99 printing from Windows 99 Confidential Print menu 176 configuration information wireless network 57 configurations printer 20 Configure MP menu 151 configuring e mail settings 114 configuring port settings 65 connecting printer to distinctive ring service 125 connecting the printer to regional adapters 125 conservation settings brightness adjusting 71 Quiet Mode 69 Sleep Mode 70 71 standard exit bin lighting 72 conserving supplies 68 contacting customer support 318 control panel printer 23 copy quality adjusting 106 copy screen advanced options 112 options 110 111 112 113 139 Copy Settings menu 188 copy troubleshooting copier does not respond 289 partial document or photo copies 291 poor copy quality 290 poor scanned image quality 293 scanner unit does not close 290 copying adding a date and time stamp 109 adding an overlay message 109 adjusting quality 106 339 canceling a copy job 109 110 collating copies 107 custom job job build 108 different paper sizes 105 enlarging 106 in black and white 104 multiple pages on one sheet 108 on both sides of the paper duplexing 105 on letterhead 103 on transparencies 103 photos
336. r 2 Remove the metal panel a Turn the screws on the panel counterclockwise to remove them Additional printer setup 36 b Shift the metal panel to the left to disengage the hooks then pull forward to remove it 3 Use the following illustration to locate the appropriate connectors Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors CNNNNNNNNMS a al 1 Memory card connector 2 Firmware and flash memory card connectors 3 Internal print server connector 4 Hard disk connector J Additional printer setup 4 Reattach the system board cover Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors a Reinstall the hooks on the left side of the metal panel into the slots on the system board cage and then shift to the right 37 Additional printer setup 38 b Align and then turn each screw clockwise to tighten C Close the cover Installing a memory card A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from
337. r e f you are using DSL then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use For more information contact your DSL provider f you are using a PBX telephone service then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX If none exists consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine CHECK FOR A DIAL TONE e Place atest call to the telephone number to which you want to send a fax to make sure that it is working correctly fthe telephone line is being used by another device then wait until the other device is finished before sending a fax e f you are using the On Hook Dial feature then turn up the volume to verify a dial tone Troubleshooting 296 TEMPORARILY DISCONNECT OTHER EQUIPMENT To ensure the printer is working correctly connect it directly to the telephone line Disconnect any answering machines computers with modems or telephone line splitters CHECK FOR JAMS Clear any jams and then make sure that Ready appears TEMPORARILY DISABLE CALL WAITING Call Waiting can disrupt fax transmissions Disable this feature before sending or receiving a fax Call your telephone company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling Call Waiting Voice MAIL SERVICE MAY BE INTERFERING WITH THE FAX TRANSMISSION Voice Mail offered through your local telephone company may disrupt fax transmissions To enable both Voice Mail and the printer to answer calls you may wan
338. r e Touch Prompt each page paper loaded or Do not prompt paperloadedto clear the message and continue printing Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray Cancel the print job Load Manual Feeder with paper type paper size Try one or more of the following Load the specified paper in the manual feeder e Touch Prompt each page paper loaded or Do not prompt paperloaded to clear the message and continue printing Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray Cancel the print job Load staples Try one or more of the following Replace the specified staple cartridge in the finisher Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Note The print job will be stapled if the staple cartridge is replaced or inserted Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Memory full cannot print faxes There is not enough memory to print the fax job Troubleshooting 276 Touch Continue to clear the message without printing Held faxes will attempt to print after the printer has been restarted Reattach bin x Try one or more of the following Turn the printer off and then back on Reattach the specified bin 1 uU bb Y N 6 Turn the printer off Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Remove the specified bin Reattach the bin Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet Turn the printer back on Rem
339. r different sizes copying 105 letterhead 86 preprinted forms 86 recycled 86 saving 108 selecting 86 storing 88 unacceptable 86 Universal Paper Size 158 Universal size setting 74 using recycled 68 paper feed troubleshooting message remains after jam is cleared 302 paper jams avoiding 257 paper jams clearing 200 paper jam 259 201 paper jam 259 202 203 paper jams 260 230 paper jam 261 231 239 paper jams 262 24x paper jam 262 250 paper jam 263 280 289 paper jam 264 280 299 242 290 292 paper jams 265 400 403 paper jams 265 431 438 paper jams 266 460 461 paper jams 265 Paper Loading menu 155 paper size setting 74 Paper Size Type menu 148 paper sizes supported by printer 88 Paper Texture menu 152 paper type setting 74 paper types duplex support 90 supported by printer 90 where to load 90 Paper Weight menu 154 Parallel x menu 169 PCL Emul menu 231 PDF menu 230 photos copying 103 placing separator sheets between copies 107 port settings configuring 65 PostScript menu 231 print cartridge replacing 248 print cartridges ordering 246 print irregularities 306 print job canceling from computer 100 print quality cleaning the ADF parts 242 cleaning the printhead lenses 244 cleaning the scanner glass 241 print quality troubleshooting black streaks on a page 311 blank pages 309 characters have jagged edges 303 clipped images 303 fine horizontal lines 303 gray background on prints 304 light colored line white
340. r Generates color print jobs output Color Note Color is the factory default setting Black Only Collate Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies On 1 2 1 2 1 2 Off 1 1 1 2 2 2 Note On is the factory default setting Sides Duplex Specifies whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the page 1 sided Note 1 sided is the factory default setting 2 sided Staple Specifies whether prints are stapled Off Notes On e Off is the factory default setting This menu appears only when a stapler is installed Understanding printer menus 220 Hole Punch Off On Specifies whether prints have punched holes Notes Offis the factory default setting This menu appears only when a stapler is installed Hole Punch Mode 2 holes 3 holes 4 holes Determines the type of punch finishing performed on a print Notes e 3 holes is the US factory default setting 4 holes is the international factory default setting This menu appears only when a puncher is installed Duplex Binding Long Edge Short Edge Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page Notes Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for p
341. r Macintosh users specify the paper type from the Print dialog AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES IVIAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE PRINT CARTRIDGE Replace the worn or defective print cartridge IVIAKE SURE THE TRANSFER BELT IS NOT DEFECTIVE Replace the defective transfer belt For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part IVIAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT DEFECTIVE Replace the defective fuser For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part Print is too dark ES ABC DEF Try one or more of the following LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type setting For Windows users check this setting from Print Properties Troubleshooting 308 For Macintosh users check this setting from the Print dialog IVIAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE PRINT CARTRIDGE Replace the defective print cartridge Print is too light Try one or more of the following LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE The paper may have absorbed moisture from high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROU
342. r Size Type menu Menu item Tray x Size Letter Legal Executive Oficio Mexico Folio Statement Universal A4 AS JIS B5 Description Specifies the paper size loaded in each tray Notes Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting For trays with automatic size sensing only the size detected by the hardware appears Ifthe same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and Paper Type settings match then the trays are automatically linked When one tray is empty the print job uses the linked tray Note Only installed trays are listed in this menu d Xx Understanding printer menus Menu item Tray x Type Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled Glossy Heavy Glossy Labels Vinyl Labels Bond Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Paper Custom Type x 149 Description Specifies the type of paper loaded in each tray Notes Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1 Custom Type x is the factory default setting for all other trays f available a user defined name will appear instead of Custom Type x Usethis menu item to configure automatic tray linking MP Feeder Size Letter Legal Executive Oficio Mexico Folio Statement Universal 7 3 4 Envelope 9 Envelope 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope B5 Envelope Other Envelope A4 A5 A6 JIS B5
343. r defined RGB or CMYK value The likeness of the colors in the set are dependent on the value entered in the RGB or CMYK Increment box To access a detailed Color Samples set from the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address or host name of the printer then you can View the information on the printer control panel home screen or in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP IP section 2 Click Configuration Color Samples Detailed Options 3 Select a color conversion table 4 Enter the RGB or CMYK color number 5 Enter an increment value from 1 255 Note The closer the value is to 1 the narrower the color sample range will appear 6 Click Print Troubleshooting 318 Embedded Web Server does not open Try one or more of the following CHECK THE NETWORK CONNECTION Make sure the printer and computer are turned on and connected to the same network CHECK THE ADDRESS ENTERED IN THE WEB BROWSER e Depending onthe network settings you may need to type https instead of http before the printer IP address to access the Embedded Web Server For more information contact your system support person Make sure printer IP address is correct TEMPORARILY DISABLE WEB PROXY SERVERS Proxy servers may block or r
344. r from linked set bin name Remove paper from the specified bin The printer automatically detects paper removal and resumes printing If removing the paper does not clear the message then touch Continue Restore held jobs Try one or more of the following Touch Restore to restore all held jobs stored on the printer hard disk Touch Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored Scanner automatic feeder cover open Close the ADF cover Slide finisher to the left Slide the mailbox or finisher to the left until it clicks into place Some held jobs were not restored Touch Continue to delete the specified job Note Held jobs that are not restored stay on the hard disk and are inaccessible Supply needed to complete job A supply needed to complete the job is missing Touch Cancel to clear the message Troubleshooting 278 Tray x paper size unsupported The paper size in the specified tray is unsupported Replace it with a supported paper size Unsupported disk An unsupported disk has been inserted Remove the unsupported disk and then install a supported one 31 xx Missing or defective color cartridge Try one or more of the following 1 Remove and reinstall the specified print cartridge For instructions on removing a print cartridge touch More Information 2 Touch Continue to clear the message Note If the message is not cleared then replace the defective print cartridge 32 xx
345. r that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number Click Add Scanning to an FTP address 138 Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen 1 From the home screen navigate to FTP gt type the FTP address gt gt enter a name for the shortcut gt Done 2 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct and then touch OK If the name or number is incorrect then touch Cancel and then reenter the information If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number 3 Touch Submit Understanding FTP options FTP This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination Note Addresses should be in dot notation form for example yyy yyy yyy yyy File Name This option lets you enter the file name of the scanned document Original Size This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents for FTP sending e Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting The FTP screen appears with the new setting displayed When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes When Original Size is set to Auto Size Sense the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document Send As This option sets the output PDF TIFF JPEG or XPS for the scanned image PDF Creates a single file with multiple pages viewable with
346. rd or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Make sure that all external connections such as Ethernet and telephone system connections are properly installed in their marked plug in ports This product is designed tested and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific manufacturer s components The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious The manufacturer is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Do not cut twist bind crush or place heavy objects on the power cord Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture and walls If any of these things happen a risk of fire or electrical shock results Inspect the power cord regularly for signs of such problems Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it Safety information 17 Refer service or repairs other than those described in the user documentation to a professional service person CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD To avoid the risk of electric shock whe
347. re Program to any public or distributed network c Reservation of Rights The Software Program including all fonts is copyrighted and owned by Lexmark International Inc and or its suppliers Lexmark reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this License Agreement d Freeware Notwithstanding the terms and conditions of this License Agreement all or any portion of the Software Program that constitutes software provided under public license by third parties Freeware is licensed to you subject to the terms and conditions of the software license agreement accompanying such Freeware whether in the form of a discrete agreement shrink wrap license or electronic license terms at the time of download Use of the Freeware by you shall be governed entirely by the terms and conditions of such license 6 TRANSFER You may transfer the Software Program to another end user Any transfer must include all software components media printed materials and this License Agreement and you may not retain copies of the Software Program or components thereof The transfer may not be an indirect transfer such as a consignment Prior to the transfer the end user receiving the transferred Software Program must agree to all these License Agreement terms Upon transfer of the Software Program your license is automatically terminated You may not rent sublicense or assign the Software Program except to the extent provided in this License Agreement and any
348. re being used Color Balance Cyan 5to5 Magenta 5to5 Yellow 5to5 Black 5to5 Reset Defaults 0 Adjusts color in printed output by increasing or decreasing the amount of toner being used for each color Note 0 is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 228 a Menu item Description Color Samples Prints sample pages for each of the RGB and CMYK color conversion tables used in the sRGB Display printer sRGB Vivid Notes Display True Black Selecting any setting prints the sample Vivid Off RGB Color samples consist of a series of colored boxes along with the RGB or CMYK US CMYK combination that creates the color observed These pages can be used to help decide which combinations to use to get the desired printed output Euro CMYK Vivid CMYK From a browser window type the IP address of the printer to access a complete is list of color sample pages from the Embedded Web Server Off CMYK Manual Color Customizes the RGB color conversions RGB Image Notes Vivid sRGB Display sRGB Display is the factory default setting for RGB Image This applies a color conversion table to an output that matches the colors displayed on a computer Display True Black eiii sRGB Vivid Off sRGB Vivid is the factory default setting for RGB Text and RGB Graphics sRGB Vivid applies a color table that increases saturation This is preferred for business RGB Text graphics and text Vivid e Vivi
349. re not restored cccsccccssssccecesssesseececesseseeeesceesseseeeeseseassessesssesesesscseuseeeceseeaseueeeseesesaaes 277 Supply needed to complete job ccoo acatar tiendita tancia 277 Tray Xx paper size unsupported ede iaa 278 Unsupported disk iii 278 31 xx Missing or defective color cartridge esses enne nnne nennen nnns 278 32 xx color cartridge part number unsupported by device sss nnne 278 34 Incorrect paper size open src ssessseeesseseseeeeen nnne enne nennen nens nnne sueseaseseseeseaeaaes 278 35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature cccccccsssssccecesssseceesesenseeeeceesseeseeesesesseeeseessaaanes 278 37 Insufficient memory to collate jOb cooococnnoonooconnnnnonoonnncnnononnnononnnnanonnnoncnnnnonnnnnnnnnnncnnnnn nono nnnnnnnnnannnos 279 37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation cccccnocccnncnnonoonnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononcnonannnos 279 37 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted ooooooccnccooooocnnconcononnnnncnnnannccnonononnnn cono nono noncnanannnos 279 37 Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored sess 279 EHAITUPTADN 279 39 Complex page some data may not have printed esses enne nnne nnns 279 40 color invalid refill change cartridge ccccccccccsssssce
350. rinter waits for user Job Hold Timeout intervention before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources 5 255 sec and continues to print other jobs in the print queue Notes 30 sec is the factory default setting This menu appears only when a printer hard disk is installed Print Recovery Auto Continue Disabled 5 255 Lets the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline situations when not resolved within the specified time period Note Disabled is the factory default setting Print Recovery Jam Recovery Auto On Off Specifies whether the printer reprints jammed pages Notes Auto is the factory default setting The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks e On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages Print Recovery Page Protect Off On Lets the printer successfully print a page that may not have printed otherwise Notes e Off is the factory default setting Off prints a partial page when there is not enough memory to print the whole page On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the entire page prints Understanding printer menus Menu item Press Sleep Button Sleep Hibernate Do nothing 187 Description Determines how the printer while in Idle state reacts to a short press of the Sleep button Notes
351. rk Note Do not connect the installation or network cables until prompted to do so by the setup software Additional printer setup 58 SSID The SSID is also referred to as the network name Wireless Mode or Network Mode The mode will be either infrastructure or ad hoc Channel for ad hoc networks The channel defaults to auto for infrastructure networks Some ad hoc networks will also require the auto setting Check with your system support person if you are not sure which channel to select Security Method There are three basic options for Security Method WEP key If your network uses more than one WEP key enter up to four in the provided spaces Select the key currently in use on the network by selecting the Default WEP Transmit Key or WPA or WPA2 passphrase WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security The choices are AES or TKIP Encryption must be set for the same type on the router and on the printer or the printer will not be able to communicate on the network No security If your wireless network does not use any type of security then you will not have any security information Note Using an unsecured wireless network is not recommended If you are installing the printer on an 802 1X network using the Advanced method then you may need the following Authentication type nner authentication type 802 1X username and password Certificates Note For more informat
352. rt Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled Troubleshooting 282 57 Configuration change some held jobs were not restored Something has changed in the printer to invalidate the held jobs Possible changes include The printer firmware has been updated Paper input options needed for the print job were removed The print job was created using data from a device in the USB port and the device is no longer in the USB port The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored while installed in a different printer model Touch Continue to clear the message 58 Too many bins attached 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the additional bins 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on 58 Too many disks installed 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the excess disks 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on 58 Too many flash options installed 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the excess flash memory 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 5 Turn the printer back on 58 Too many trays attached 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the additional trays Troubleshooting 283 4 Connect the power
353. ry is set to Auto then the printer reprints the jammed page if enough printer memory is available Avoiding jams Paper tray recommendations Make sure the paper lies flat in the tray Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing Do not load a tray while the printer is printing Load it prior to printing or wait for a prompt to load it Do not load too much paper Make sure the stack height does not exceed the indicated maximum height Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing too tightly against the paper or envelopes Push the tray in firmly after loading paper Paper recommendations Use only recommended paper or specialty media Do not load wrinkled creased damp bent or curled paper Flex and straighten paper before loading it Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand Do not mix paper sizes weights or types in the same stack Make sure all sizes and types are set correctly in the printer control panel menus Store paper per manufacturer recommendations Understanding jam numbers and locations When a jam occurs a message indicating the jam location appears on the display Open doors and covers and remove trays to access jam locations To resolve any paper jam message you must clear all jammed paper from the paper path Clearing jams Area Jam numbers 258 What to do 1 200 239 Open side
354. s and provide collection and recycling programs For more information see The Notices chapter The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com environment The Lexmark recycling program at www lexmark com recycle By selecting certain printer settings or tasks you may be able to reduce your printer s impact even further This chapter outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit Saving paper and toner Studies show that as much as 80 of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage You can significantly reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions such as printing on both sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper For information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting see Using Eco Mode Using recycled paper As an environmentally conscious company Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for use in laser printers For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer see Using recycled paper and other office papers on page 86 Conserving supplies Use both sides of the paper If your printer model supports duplex printing you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the paper by selecting 2 sided printing from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar
355. s and letterhead Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead Use grain long for 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib weight paper Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces Use papers printed with heat resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers The ink must be able to withstand temperatures up to 190 C 374 F without melting or releasing hazardous emissions Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner Inks that are oxidation set or oil based generally meet these requirements latex inks might not When in doubt contact the paper supplier Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 190 C 374 F without melting or releasing hazardous emissions Using recycled paper and other office papers As an environmentally conscientious company Lexmark supports the use of recycled paper produced specifically for use in laser electrophotographic printers While no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well Lexmark consistently tests papers that represent recycled cut size copier papers available on the global market This scientific testing is conducted with rigor and discipline Many factors are taken into consideration both separately and as a whole including the following Amount of post consumer waste Lexmark tests up to 100
356. s into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Reports and then click the type of report you want to view Administrative support 256 Restoring factory default settings If you want to retain a list of the current menu settings for reference then print a menu settings page before restoring the factory default settings Warning Potential Damage Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default settings Exceptions include the display language custom sizes and messages and network port menu settings All downloads stored in RAM are deleted Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected From the home screen navigate to amp gt Settings gt General Settings gt Factory Defaults gt Restore Now gt Submit Clearing jams 257 Clearing jams By carefully selecting paper and loading it properly you can avoid most jams If jams do occur follow the steps outlined in this section To clear a jam message and resume printing clear the entire paper path and then touch Continue jam cleared If Jam Recovery is set to On then the printer prints a new copy of the page that jammed If Jam Recove
357. s that Off specify Card Stock as the paper type Duplex Note Off is the factory default setting Notes Duplex sets the printer default to 2 sided printing for every print job unless 1 sided printing is selected from Print Properties f Duplex is selected then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit including 1 sided print jobs NS Understanding printer menus Menu item Recycled Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Recycled as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting 156 Description Glossy Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Glossy as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Heavy Glossy Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Heavy Glossy as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Labels Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Labels as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Vinyl Labels Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Vinyl Labels as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Bond Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Bond as th
358. s that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs Cancel Faxes Specifies whether or not the printer cancels fax jobs Allow Don t Allow Caller 1D Specifies type of caller ID being used On Off Alternate Fax number masking Specifies the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number Off Note The number of characters masked is determined by the Digits to mask From left setting From right Digits to mask Specifies the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number 0 58 Understanding printer menus Menu item 196 Fax Cover Page Fax Cover Page Off by default On by default Never use Always use Include to field On Off Include from field Off On From Include Message field Off On Message Include Logo Off On Include Footer x Footer x Description Configures the fax cover page Note Off by default is the factory default setting for all Fax Cover Page options Fax Send Settings Menu item Description Resolution Standard Fine 200 dpi Super Fine 300 dpi Ultra Fine 600 dpi Specifies quality in dots per inch dpi A higher resolution gives greater print quality but increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes Note Standard is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus a Menu item Original Size Mixed Sizes Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Universal 4x 6in 3x5 in
359. s to be sent by the printer Allow Save as Shortcut On Off Lets you save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer Dial Mode Tone Pulse Specifies the dialing sound either as a tone or a pulse Understanding printer menus Menu item Max Speed 2400 4800 9600 14400 33600 199 Description Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent Custom Job scanning Off On Lets you scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file Scan Preview Off On Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs Background Removal 4to4 Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Enables an equal balance of colors in the output Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Specifies which color to drop during faxing and how much to increase or decrease the dropout Notes None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Contrast Best for content 0 5 Specifies the contrast of the output Note Best for content is the factory default setting Mirror Image Off On Creates a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory
360. sanausaeeseeeeseeeeseseeseseseseeess 318 Clieclcthe network conriectior seo tope en eR e Enea ee eer eae ERG eR ER XR EYE ee eee edeeb esu dave ped 318 Check the address entered in the Web browser esses nennen ener nnne en nnn ne tnnr nnne nnne 318 Temporarily disable Web proxy servers sess enne nnne s enne nenn nnns nae n rennen 318 Contacting customer suppOLFt 2d eco e cies Dec Dee teer vie e oce DN EY eaae Ten o due E ea IATE ue esa ce Dee Oe ov Ys 318 Melle CNET NITIDE XE Product intormatioD z o i aree aa ai as 319 Edition NOTICE ERN TRITT TERI TOTIS ER 319 POWEF CONSUMIDO Nica S m 324 ae A RANA p T Safety information 16 Safety information Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY This product uses a laser Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure This product uses a printing process that heats the print media and the heat may cause the media to release emissions You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The lithium battery in this product is not intended to b
361. se if you are using a high capacity input tray a duplex unit and an input option or more than one input option If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes then you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters 1 Unpack the optional tray and then remove all packing material 2 Place the tray near the printer 3 Turn the printer off 4 Align the printer with the tray and then lower the printer into place Note Optional trays lock together when stacked When necessary remove stacked trays one at a time from the top down Additional printer setup 54 1 Standard 550 sheet tray Tray 1 2 Optional 550 sheet trays 5 Turn the printer back on 6 Set the printer software to recognize the optional input source For more information see Updating available options in the printer driver on page 57 Attaching cables CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections such as the fax feature power cord or telephone during a lightning storm Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or Ethernet cable Be sure to match the following The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port Additional printer setup 55 1 USB port Warning
362. send but not receive faxes 296 cannot send or receive a fax 295 received fax has poor print quality 297 troubleshooting paper feed message remains after jam is cleared 302 troubleshooting print error reading flash drive 286 held jobs do not print 287 Index incorrect characters print 288 incorrect margins 305 jammed pages are not reprinted 302 job prints from wrong tray 288 job prints on wrong paper 288 jobs do not print 286 Large jobs do not collate 289 multiple language PDF files do not print 286 paper curl 306 paper frequently jams 302 print job takes longer than expected 288 tray linking does not work 288 unexpected page breaks occur 289 troubleshooting print quality black streaks on a page 311 blank pages 309 characters have jagged edges 303 clipped images 303 fine horizontal lines 303 gray background on prints 304 light colored line white line or incorrectly colored line appears on prints 305 poor transparency quality 314 print irregularities 306 print is too dark 307 print is too light 308 repeating print defects 309 shadow images appear on prints 304 skewed print 310 solid color or black pages appear on prints 310 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 311 streaked vertical lines 312 toner fog or background shading 312 toner rubs off 313 toner specks 314 uneven print density 314 white streaks on a page 311 troubleshooting printer options 2 000 sheet drawer prob
363. server at a time Once an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person the name of the destination becomes available as a shortcut number An FTP destination could also be another printer for example a color document can be scanned and then sent to a color printer Scanning to an FTP address Scanning to an FTP address using the touch screen 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to FTP gt FTP gt type the FTP address gt Send It Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Scanning to an FTP address 137 Sti Press and then enter the FTP shortcut number 4 Touch Send It Scanning to an FTP address using the address book 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the A
364. service remove all print cartridges programs data and removable storage media unless directed otherwise by Lexmark For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact Lexmark on the World Wide Web at http support lexmark com Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period For products no longer covered by a Lexmark warranty technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee Notices 333 Extent of limited warranty Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints produced by any product Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by Modification or unauthorized attachments Accidents misuse abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user s guides manuals instructions or guidance Unsuitable physical or operating environment Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications Refurbishment repair refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products supplies or parts Products supplies parts materials such as toners and inks software or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUP
365. sk mounting bracket and then remove the bracket Additional printer setup 48 c Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the ISP and then press down on the printer hard disk until the standoffs are in place d Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP Note The plugs and receptacles are color coded Additional printer setup 49 To install a printer hard disk directly on the system board a Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the system board and then press down on the printer hard disk until the standoffs are in place b Use the two provided screws to attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the system board Note The plugs and receptacles are color coded Additional printer setup 4 Reattach the system board cover 50 Additional printer setup 51 Removing a printer hard disk Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System boar
366. slog Remote Syslog Server Remote Syslog Port Remote Syslog Method Remote Syslog Facility Log full behavior Admin s e mail address Digitally sign exports Severity of events to log Remote Syslog non logged events E mail log cleared alert E mail log wrapped alert E mail full alert full alert level E mail log exported alert E mail log settings changed alert Log line endings 178 Description Specifies whether and how the audit logs are created Note Factory default settings enable the security audit log Set Date and Time menu Menu item Current Date and Time Description Lets you view the current date and time settings for the printer Manually Set Date and Time Note Date Time is set in YYYY MM DD HH MM SS format Time Zone Note GMT is the factory default setting Automatically Observe DST On Off Note On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time associated with the Time Zone setting Custom Time Zone Setup DST Start Week DST Start DayOff DST Start Month DST Start Time DST End Week DST End Day DST End Month DST End Time DST Offset Enables the user to set up the time zone Enable NTP On Off Enables Network Time Protocol which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a network Note On is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus Menu item NTP Server 179 Description Lets y
367. snsseeeceeceecesseseseseeseeceesseseesessusaeeeeeseessessesesteesnaes 265 431 438 paper jams oiri AN 266 455 staple Jatm onte ici 266 Contents 11 Troubleshootlhg ese a vaa AAA OF Solving basic printer problems eese eene nennen nennen nnnm nnn nas as rsen nee n reinen nn nnn nnns 269 Understanding printer M SSARES ccccccesessssseeceeceecescesesesneenensaeaeeeceseeceecessesesnseaeeseeceseesessesessesseeeeesees 269 AdjUsting Color aetate Dementia buone het ubt ni taie 269 An error has occurred with the USB drive Please remove and reinsert drive eeeseesessessss 269 Change paper source to custom type NAME esses nnne nn nnns 269 Change paper source to custom type name load orientation 270 Change paper source to custom string esses eene nnne nenne rennen nenne 270 Change paper source to custom string load orientation 270 Change paper source to paper size paper type 270 Change paper source to paper size paper type load orientation 270 Close paper transport Cover A ie turc erigi gie Er RET TEES 270 Close left side door 5 iind het ertet nente e s EPOR Ie E iaa 271 Close tray doQE eot ettet a cioida a 271 Glose finishier side dOOF rectae tette eese eet eie o alie Laan ta eee ee ela hiemes Tor doe 271 Close finishertop CoVel etait ttr tu tidie ete seit beate ence 271 Close tront dOOEs iom tree
368. sp the jammed paper and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Close the paper transport unit door 4 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared Clearing jams 266 431 438 paper jams 1 Push down the button to slide the output finisher to the right 2 Open the finisher door and then removed the jammed paper Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Close the finisher door 4 Slide the finisher back until it clicks in place 5 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared 455 staple jam 1 Press the latch to open the stapler door Note The stapler door is located behind the finisher Clearing jams 267 2 Lower the latch of the staple cartridge holder and then pull the staple cartridge holder out of the printer Clearing jams 268 4 Close the staple guard 5 Press down on the staple guard until it clicks into place 6 Push the staple cartridge holder firmly back into the stapler unit until the staple cartridge holder clicks into place 7 Close the stapler door 8 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared Troubleshooting 269 Troubleshooting Solving basic printer problems If there are basic printer problems or the printer is unresponsive make sure The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or
369. ss status of supplies status of the network connection and other information Device Statistics Prints a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and details about printed pages Network Setup Page Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address information Note This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected to print servers Network x Setup Page Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address information Notes This menu item is available when there is more than one network option installed This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected to print servers Understanding printer menus z Menu item Shortcut List 161 Description Prints a report containing information about configured shortcuts Fax Job Log Prints a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes Note This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax Settings menu Fax Call Log Prints a report containing information about the last 100 attempted received and blocked calls Note This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax Settings menu Copy Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about copy shortcuts E mail Shortcuts Prints a
370. ss point wireless router 3 Select the type of security you want to use to protect your wireless network 4 Enter the security information necessary for the printer to connect to the wireless network 5 Click Submit 6 Open the AirPort application on your computer In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences Network AirPort In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier From the Finder navigate to Applications Internet Connect AirPort 7 From the Network pop up menu select the name of your wireless network Configure your computer to use the printer wirelessly To print on a network printer each Macintosh user must install a custom printer driver file and create a print queue in the Printer Setup Utility or Print Center 1 Install a printer driver file on the computer a Insert the Software and Documentation CD and then double click the installer package for the printer b Follow the instructions on the computer screen Additional printer setup Select a destination and then click Continue From the Easy Install screen click Install e Type the user password and then click OK f All necessary applications are installed in the computer Click Close when installation is complete 2 Add the printer a For IP printing In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later 1 From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences Print amp Fax 2 Click and then click the IP
371. ssessments and found that paper was identified as the primary contributor up to 8096 of carbon emissions caused throughout the entire life of a device from design to end of life This is due to the energy intensive manufacturing processes required to make paper Thus Lexmark seeks to educate customers and partners on minimizing the impact of paper Using recycled paper is one way Eliminating excessive and unnecessary paper consumption is another Lexmark is well equipped to help customers minimize printing and copying waste In addition the company encourages purchasing paper from suppliers who demonstrate their commitment to sustainable forestry practices Lexmark does not endorse specific suppliers although a converter s product list for special applications is maintained However the following paper choice guidelines will help alleviate the environmental impact of printing 1 Minimize paper consumption 2 Be selective about the origin of wood fiber Buy from suppliers who carry certifications such as the Forestry Stewardship Council FSC or The Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification PEFC These certifications guarantee that the paper manufacturer uses wood pulp from forestry operators that employ environmentally and socially responsible forest management and restoration practices 3 Choose the most appropriate paper for printing needs normal 75 or 80 g m certified paper lower weight paper or recycled paper Unaccepta
372. sure to print on the recommended type of color transparencies What is manual color correction When manual color correction is enabled the printer employs user selected color conversion tables to process objects However Color Correction must be set to Manual or no user defined color conversion will be implemented Manual color correction settings are specific to the type of object being printed text graphics or images and how the color of the object is specified in the software program RGB or CMYK combinations Notes Manual color correction is not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK combinations It is also not effective in situations in which the software program or the computer operating system controls the adjustment of colors The color conversion tables applied to each object when Color Correction is set to Auto generate preferred colors for the majority of documents To manually apply a different color conversion table 1 From the Quality menu select Color Correction and then select Manual 2 From the Quality menu select Manual Color and then select the appropriate color conversion table for the affected object type Manual Color menu Object type Color conversion tables RGB Image Vivid Produces brighter more saturated colors and may be applied RGB Text to all incoming color formats RGB Graphics sRGB Display Produces an output that approximates the colors
373. t Height select the width or height Submit Loading paper and specialty media 75 Loading the standard or optional 550 sheet tray The printer has one standard 550 sheet tray Tray 1 and may have one or more optional 550 sheet trays All 550 sheet trays support the same paper sizes and types CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each paper drawer or tray separately Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed 1 Pull the tray out Notice the size indicators on the bottom of the tray Use these indicators to help position the length and width guides Loading paper and specialty media 76 2 Squeeze and then slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading 3 Squeeze and then slide the length guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading Note The length guide has a locking device To unlock push the button on top of the length guide backward To lock push the button forward when a length has been selected 4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 5 Load the paper stack with the recommended print side faceup Loading paper and specialty media 77 Notes Place the print side facedown for duplex printing Place pre punched paper with the holes toward the front of the tray Place letterheads faceup with the header on the le
374. t may not be properly installed Reinstall the paper tray For more information see the hardware setup documentation that came with the paper tray or go to http support lexmark com to view the paper tray instruction sheet 2 000 sheet drawer problems CHECK THE DRAWER CONNECTION Make sure the 2 000 sheet drawer is properly connected to the printer LOAD PAPER If the tray is empty then load paper in the tray or feeder CLEAR ANY JAMS Open the side door of the tray or feeder and then remove any jammed paper AVOID PAPER JAMS Flex the paper Make sure the drawer is properly installed Make sure paper is loaded correctly Make sure the paper stack you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray Make sure the paper or specialty media meets specifications and is not damaged Make sure the guides are positioned correctly for the paper size loaded Cannot detect flash memory card Make sure the flash memory card is securely connected to the printer system board Cannot detect printer hard disk Make sure the printer hard disk is securely connected to the printer system board Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly Try one or more of the following CHECK THE INTERNAL SOLUTIONS Port ISP CONNECTIONS Make sure the ISP is securely connected to the printer system board Troubleshooting 301 CHECK THE CABLE Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is secure
375. t to consider adding a second telephone line for the printer THE PRINTER MEMORY MAY BE FULL 1 Dial the fax number 2 Scan the original document one page at a time Can send but not receive faxes Try one or more of the following LOAD PAPER If the tray is empty then load paper in the tray or feeder CHECK THE RING COUNT DELAY SETTINGS The ring count delay sets the number of times the phone rings before the printer answers If you have extension phones on the same line as the printer or subscribe to the telephone company s Distinctive Ring service then keep the Ring Delay setting at 4 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup 3 In the Rings to Answer field enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before the printer answers 4 Click Submit Troubleshooting 297 REPLACE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE Replace the toner or print cartridge Can receive but not send faxes These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following THE PRINTER IS NOT IN FAX MODE On the home screen touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode THE DOCUMENT IS NOT LOAD
376. the Normal Standby Mode list select the light setting for the standard exit bin when in Ready or Standby mode 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Output Lighting 2 Touch the arrow button next to Normal Standby Mode to select the light settings for the standard exit bin when in Ready or Standby Mode 3 Touch Submit Recycling Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling For more information see The Notices chapter The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com environment The Lexmark recycling program at www lexmark com recycle Recycling Lexmark products To return Lexmark products for recycling 1 Visit our Web site at www lexmark com recycle 2 Find the product type you want to recycle and then select your country or region from the list 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Note Printer supplies and hardware not listed in a Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local recycling center Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 73 Recycling Lexmark packaging Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner
377. the Software Program and requested by you Lexmark agrees not to use this information in a form that personally identifies you except to the extent necessary to provide such services EXPORT RESTRICTIONS You may not a acquire ship transfer or reexport directly or indirectly the Software Program or any direct product therefrom in violation of any applicable export laws or b permit the Software Program to be used for any purpose prohibited by such export laws including without limitation nuclear chemical or biological weapons proliferation AGREEMENT TO CONTRACT ELECTRONICALLY You and Lexmark agree to form this License Agreement electronically This means that when you click the Agree or Yes button on this page or use this product you acknowledge your agreement to these License Agreement terms and conditions and that you are doing so with the intent to sign a contract with Lexmark CAPACITY AND AUTHORITY TO CONTRACT You represent that you are of the legal age of majority in the place you sign this License Agreement and if applicable you are duly authorized by your employer or principal to enter into this contract ENTIRE AGREEMENT This License Agreement including any addendum or amendment to this License Agreement that is included with the Software Program is the entire agreement between you and Lexmark relating to the Software Program Except as otherwise provided for herein these terms and conditions supersede
378. the printer does not impose a lockout time Panel Login Timeout specifies how long the printer remains idle on the Home screen before automatically logging the user off Settings range from 1 900 seconds 30 seconds is the factory default setting Remote Login Timeout specifies how long a remote interface remains idle before automatically logging the user off Settings range from 1 120 seconds 10 minutes is the factory default setting Security Reset Jumper Access controlsz No Security No Effect Reset factory security defaults Changes the value of the security settings Notes e Access controlsz No Security retains all the security information that the user has defined No Security is the factory default setting No Effect means the reset has no effect on the device s security configuration Reset factory security defaults deletes all security information that the user has defined and assigns the factory default value to each setting in the Miscellaneous Security Settings section of both the panel and the Web page LDAP Certificate Verification Demand Try Allow Never Allows the user to request a server certificate Notes Demand means a server certificate is requested If a bad certificate is provided or if no certificate is provided the session is terminated immediately Demand is the factory default setting Try means a server certificate is requested If no certificate is provided
379. the relative weight of the envelopes loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Heavy Light J Understanding printer menus 155 Menu item Description Rough Envelope Weight Specifies the relative weight of the envelopes loaded Heavy Note Heavy is the factory default setting Light Normal Letterhead Weight Specifies the relative weight of the letterhead loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Heavy Light Preprinted Weight Specifies the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Heavy Light Colored Weight Specifies the relative weight of the colored paper loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Heavy Light Light Weight Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded Light Note Light is the factory default setting Heavy Weight Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded Heavy Note Heavy is the factory default setting Rough Cotton Weight Specifies the relative weight of the cotton paper loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Heavy Light Custom x Weight Specifies the relative weight of the custom paper loaded Normal Notes Heavy Light Normal is the factory default setting Settings appear only if the custom type is supported Paper Loading menu Menu item Description Card Stock Loading Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print job
380. the standard protocol ENA Address Sets the network address information for an external print server YYY YYY YYV YYY Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port ENA Netmask Sets the netmask information for an external print server YYY YYY YYY YYY Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port ENA Gateway Sets the gateway information for an external print server YYY YYY YYV YYY Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Understanding printer menus Parallel x menu 169 Menu item Description PCL SmartSwitch Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received On through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes e On is the factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off PS SmartSwitch Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received On through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language off Notes Onisthe factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incom
381. tings appear only if the custom type is supported Understanding printer menus 154 Paper Weight menu Menu item Description Plain Weight Specifies the relative weight of the plain paper loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Heavy Light Card Stock Weight Specifies the relative weight of the card stock loaded Normal Notes Heavy Light Normal is the factory default setting Settings appear only if card stock is supported Transparency Weight Specifies the relative weight of the transparencies loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Heavy Light Recycled Weight Specifies the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Heavy Light Glossy Weight Specifies the relative weight of the glossy paper loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Heavy Light Heavy Glossy Weight Specifies the relative weight of the glossy paper loaded Heavy Note Heavy is the factory default setting Labels Weight Specifies the relative weight of the labels loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Heavy Light Vinyl Labels Weight Specifies the relative weight of vinyl labels loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Heavy Light Bond Weight Specifies the relative weight of the bond paper loaded Normal Note Normal is the factory default setting Heavy Light Envelope Weight Specifies
382. tion of the original document and then changes the Sides and Binding settings to match the orientation Binding Specifies if the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge side Content This option tells the printer the original document type and source Choose content type from Text Text Photo Photo or Graphic Text Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphic Use when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Text Photo Use when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Photo Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image Choose content source from Color Laser Black White Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press or Other Color Laser Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Use when the original document was printed using a black white laser printer Inkjet Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer Photo Film Use when the original document is a photo from film Magazine Use when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper Use when the original document is from a newspaper Press Use when the original document was printed using a printing press Other Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Scanning
383. tion requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 2005 32 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and the ecodesign of energy using products Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hung ria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower III 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 Products equipped with 2 4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 1999 5 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment GQ Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries but is restricted to indoor use only Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark Internati
384. tions Load Paper Display Service Errors No Yes Message to Display Default Alternate Default text entry Alternate text entry Notes No is the factory default setting for Display Default is the factory default setting for Message to Display Home screen customization Lets you add or remove icons and buttons that appear on the home Change Language screen Copy Available options Copy shortcuts Do not display Fax Display Fax Shortcuts E mail E mail Shortcuts FTP FTP Shortcuts Search Held Jobs Held Jobs USB Drive Profiles and Solutions Bookmarks Jobs by user Forms and Favorites Date Format Specifies the format for the printer date MM DD YYYY DD MM YYYY YYYY MM DD Time Format Specifies the format for the printer time 12 hour A M P M 24 hour clock Screen Brightness Specifies the brightness of the printer control panel screen 20 100 w y Understanding printer menus Menu item One Page Copy Off On 184 Description Sets the copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time Note Off is the factory default setting Output Lighting Normal Standby Mode Off Dim Bright Sleep Mode Off Dim Bright Sets the amount of light from the standard bin Notes Dim is the factory default setting for Normal Standby Mode if Eco Mode is set to Energy or Energy Paper Bright is the factory default setting for Normal Standby Mode if Eco Mode is set to
385. to an FTP address 140 Scan Preview This option displays the first page of the original document before it is scanned completely When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Advanced Options Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings ADF Skew Fix Use to correct slight skew in the scanned image Advanced Imaging Use to adjust the Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast JPEG Quality Negative Image Mirror Image Scan edge to edge Shadow Detail Sharpness and Temperature image output settings before sending the image file Edge Erase Use to eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan Transmission Log Use to print the transmission log or transmission error log Custom Job Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job Scanning to a computer or flash drive 141 Scanning to a computer or flash drive a ADF Scanner glass M Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings y The scanner lets you
386. tore paper in cartons when possible on a pallet or shelf rather than on the floor e Store individual packages on a flat surface Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages Supported paper sizes types and weights The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper input sources and the types of paper they support Note To use a paper size that is unlisted configure a Universal Paper Size Supported paper sizes Measurements apply to simplex one sided printing only For duplex two sided printing the minimum size is 139 7 x 210 mm 5 50 x 8 27 in Dimensions Standard Optional Optional Multipurpose Duplexer 550 sheet tray 550 sheet tray 2 000 sheet feeder Tray 1 tray A4 210 x 297 mm y y y y 8 27 x 11 7 in A5 148 x 210 mm X 5 83 x 8 27 in v v v A6 105 x 148 mm X X X y X 4 13 x 5 83 in JIS B5 182 x 257 mm X 7 17 x 10 1 in v v v v Letter 215 9 x 279 4 mm 8 5 x 11 in v v v v v Legal 215 9 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 in v v v v y Executive 184 2 x 266 7 mm X 7 25 x 10 5 in v v v v Oficio M xico 215 9 x 340 4 mm J y X y y 8 5 x 13 4 in 1 Supported by X790 models only This formats the envelope size setting for 215 9 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 in unless the size is specified by the software application NS Paper and specialty media guidelines a 89
387. tting Log Paper Source Tray x Manual Feeder Specifies the paper source for printing e mail logs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Log Output Bin Standard Bin Bin x Specifies an exit bin for e mail logs Notes Standard Bin is the factory default setting Bin x only appears when at least one optional exit bin is installed E mail Bit Depth 8 bit 1 bit Enables the Text Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images when Color is set to Off Note 8 bit is the factory default setting Custom Job scanning Off On Lets you copy in a single copy job a document that contains mixed paper sizes Note Off is the factory default setting Scan Preview Off On Specifies whether or not a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Allow Save as Shortcut On Off Lets you save e mail addresses as shortcuts Notes Onisthe factory default setting When set to Off the Save as Shortcut button does not appear on the e mail Destination screen Background Removal 4 to 4 Adjusts the amount of background visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Enables an equal balance of colors in the output Understanding printer menus Menu item Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Defau
388. uct conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825 1 Class laser products are not considered to be hazardous The printer contains internally a Class IIIb 3b AlGaAs dual beam laser enclosed in a non serviceable printhead assembly operating in the wavelength of 775 800 nanometers The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation exceeding Class levels during normal operation user maintenance or prescribed service condition Laser advisory label A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown DANGER Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated Avoid exposure to laser beam Perigo Emiss o invisivel de laser quando os cartuchos s o removidos e a trava aberta Evite exposi o ao feixe Opasnost Nevidljivo lasersko zra enje kada su kasete uklonjene i poni tena sigurnosna veza Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima Pozor Nebezpe v skytu neviditeln ho laserov ho z en p i odstran n kazet a odblokov n pojistky Nevystavujte se paprsk m Fare Usynlig laserstr ling nar tonerkassetterne fjernes og aflasning oph ves Undg at komme i kontakt med str len Pas op Onzichtbare laserstraling als cartridges worden verwijderd en vergrendeling open is Voorkom blootstelling aan de stralen Danger Radiations invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du d verouillage des loquets Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser Vaara N kym t
389. uides are not pressing too lightly against the paper stack CHECK THE PAPER Make sure you are using paper that meets the printer specifications Solid color or black pages appear on prints MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGES ARE INSTALLED CORRECTLY ARE NOT DEFECTIVE AND NOT LOW ON TONER Remove the print cartridges Warning Potential Damage Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs Reinsert the print cartridges Note If the quality does not improve replace the print cartridges Troubleshooting 311 fthe problem continues the printer may need to be serviced For more information contact customer support Black or white streaks appear on transparencies or paper N A gt BC DHE DEF Try one or more of the following ENSURE THAT THE FILL PATTERN IS CORRECT If the fill pattern is incorrect choose a different fill pattern from your software program CHECK THE PAPER TYPE Use only the recommended transparencies Ensure that the Paper Type setting matches what is loaded in the tray or feeder Ensure that the Paper Texture setting is correct for the type of paper or specialty media loaded in the tray or feeder IVIAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER When 88 xx color cartridge low appears make sure the toner is distributed evenly within the print cartridge 1 Remove the print cartridge Warning Potential Da
390. ument open choose File gt Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see more options 2 From the Print dialog and pop up menus adjust the settings as needed Note To print on a specific paper type adjust the paper type setting to match the loaded paper or select the appropriate tray or feeder 3 Click Print Printing in black and white From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt Print Settings gt Quality Menu gt Print Mode gt Black Only gt Submit Adjusting toner darkness 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Printing 94 If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Print Settings gt Quality Menu gt Toner Darkness 3 Adjust the toner darkness setting 4 Click Submit Printing from a flash drive Printing from a flash drive Notes Before printing an encrypted PDF file enter the file password from the printer control panel You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions 1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port The USB Drive home screen appears Notes f you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention such as when a jam has occurred then the printer
391. under the terms of this statement is available to that user for the remainder of the warranty period You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that user Limited warranty service The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end earlier if it or its original contents are substantially used up depleted or consumed To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase You may be required to deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location You are responsible for loss of or damage to a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part the item replaced becomes the property of the Remarketer or Lexmark The replacement may be a new or repaired item The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced altered in need of a repair not included in warranty service damaged beyond repair or if the product is not free of all legal obligations restrictions liens and encumbrances Before you present this product for warranty
392. up serial printing In serial printing data is transferred one bit at a time Although serial printing is usually slower than parallel printing itis the preferred option when there is a great deal of distance between the printer and computer or when an interface with a better transfer rate is not available Additional printer setup 67 After installing the serial or communication COM port configure the printer and the computer so they can communicate Make sure you have connected the serial cable to the COM port on your printer 1 Set the parameters in the printer a From the printer control panel navigate to the menu with port settings b Locate the menu with serial port settings c Make any necessary changes to the serial settings d Save the new settings and then print a menu settings page 2 Install the printer driver a Insert the Software and Documentation CD If the installation screen does not appear after a minute then launch the CD manually 1 Click e or click Start and then click Run 2 In the Start Search or Run box type D Nsetup exe where Dis the letter of the CD or DVD drive 3 Press Enter or click OK b Click Advanced Options Custom Install c Follow the instructions on the computer screen d From the Configure Printer Connection dialog select Connect through a port discovered on your computer and then select a port e Ifthe port is not in the list then click Refresh Or Navigate to Add port se
393. ur home screen icons and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings administrative setup and active embedded solutions Copy E mail Bookmarks Fax Search 3 AS c i e Page Ch C 10f3 Held Jobs Ange opy FTP USB Language Shortcuts ZO 8 22 2 Status Ready ES Supplies Touch LES Copy Access the Copy menus and make copies E mail Access the E mail menus and send e mails Fax Access the Fax menus and send fax Access the printer menus em Note These menus are available only when the printer is in the Ready state FTP Access the File Transfer Protocol FTP menus and scan documents directly to an FTP server Status message bar Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy Show printer conditions such as Toner Lowor Cartridge Low Show intervention messages so the printer can continue processing Status Supplies Display a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue processing Access the messages screen for more information on the message and how to clear it USB or USB Thumbdrive View select print scan or e mail photos and documents from a flash drive Note This button appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory card or flash drive is connected to the printer Bookmarks Create organize and save a set of bookmarks URL into a tree view of folders and file links
394. urity and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a write access For help see the documentation that came with your operating system The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined To configure Scan to Network do the following 1 From the Embedded Web Server click Settings Device Solutions Solutions eSF Scan to Network 2 Specify the destinations and then customize the settings 3 Click Apply To use the application touch Scan to Network on the home screen and then follow the printer display prompts Setting up and using the home screen applications 31 My MFP Icon Description The application lets you customize your touch screen settings and store those preferences on a flash drive Each time you want to copy fax or scan insert the flash drive into the USB port of the printer All your personal preferences are automatically uploaded including job settings home screen preferences and address book Note The icon appears only when a flash drive with My MFP settings is inserted into the USB port of the printer s M To activate My MFP insert a flash drive into the USB port of the printer and then follow the instructions on the printer home screen display to run the setup wizard To use My MFP insert the flash drive into the USB port of the printer whenever you want to copy fax or scan WS Scan Icon Description The Web S
395. vant tre connect s l interface t l phonique En bout de ligne le nombre d appareils qui peuvent tre connect s n est pas directement limit mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas d passer cinq Le num ro REN du modem est indiqu sur l tiquette produit situ e l arri re de l quipement Les compagnies de t l phone constatent que les surtensions lectriques en particulier celles dues la foudre entra nent d importants d g ts sur les terminaux priv s connect s des sources d alimentation CA Il s agit la d un probl me majeur d chelle nationale En cons quence il vous est recommand de brancher un parasurtenseur dans la prise de courant laquelle l quipement est connect Utilisez un parasurtenseur r pondant des caract ristiques nominales satisfaisantes et certifi par le laboratoire d assureurs UL Underwriter s Laboratories un autre laboratoire agr detype NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory ou un organisme de certification agr dans votre r gion ou pays Ceci pr vient tout endommagement de l quipement caus par les orages et autres surtensions lectriques Cet quipement utilise des prises de t l phone CA11A Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network Thefollowing are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with
396. ve color cartridge 278 32 xx color cartridge part number unsupported by device 278 34 Incorrect paper size open src 278 35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 278 37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation 279 Index 37 Insufficient memory to collate job 279 37 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 279 37 Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored 279 38 Memory full 279 39 Complex page some data may not have printed 279 40 color invalid refill change cartridge 279 51 Defective flash detected 280 52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 280 53 Unformatted flash detected 280 54 Network x software error 280 54 Serial option x error 280 54 Standard network software error 280 55 Unsupported option in slot x 281 56 Parallel port x disabled 281 56 Serial port x disabled 281 56 Standard parallel port disabled 281 56 Standard USB port disabled 281 56 USB port x disabled 281 57 Configuration change some held jobs were not restored 282 58 Input config error 283 58 Too many bins attached 282 58 Too many disks installed 282 58 Too many flash options installed 282 58 Too many trays attached 282 59 Incompatible output bin x 283 62 Disk full 283 80 xx Fuser life warning 283 80 xx Fuser missing 284 80 xx Fuser near life warning 283 80 xx Replace fuser 284 82 xx Replace waste toner bottle 284 82 xx Waste toner bottle missing 284 82
397. wer cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the system board Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver 2 Unpack the card Note Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card Additional printer setup 41 3 Holding the card by its sides align the plastic pins on the card with the holes on the system board 2 1 Plastic pins 2 Metal pins 4 Push the card firmly into place Notes The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush against the system board Be careful not to damage the connectors 5 Reattach the system board cover Additional printer setup 42 Installing an Internal Solutions Port The system board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port ISP Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to th
398. ws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility and safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hung ria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower III 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 Radio interference notice Warning This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN55022 Class A limits and immunity requirements of EN55024 This product is not intended to be used in residential domestic environments This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Notice to users of the US telephone network FCC requirements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments ACTA On the back of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEQHHTXXXX If requested this nu
399. x number s in the Fax number s field Fax numbers can be entered manually or by using the Phone Book feature 4 If necessary enter a prefix in the Dialing prefix field Faxing 129 5 Select the appropriate paper size and page orientation 6 If you want to include a cover page with the fax then select Include cover page with fax and enter the appropriate information 7 Click OK Notes The Fax option is available for use only with the PostScript driver or the Universal Fax Driver For information on installing these drivers see the Software and Documentation CD The Fax option must be configured and enabled in the PostScript driver under Configuration tab before it can be used e f the Always display settings prior to faxing check box is selected then you will be prompted to verify the recipient information before the fax is sent If this check box is not selected then the queued document will be sent automatically as a fax when you click OK on the Fax tab Sending a fax using shortcuts Fax shortcuts are just like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or fax machine A shortcut number 1 99999 can contain a single recipient or multiple recipients 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not place postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scann
400. xx Waste toner bottle nearly full 284 83 xx Replace transfer module 284 83 xx Transfer module life warning 284 83 xx Transfer module missing 284 840 01 Scanner disabled by admin 285 840 02 Scanner disabled Contact system administrator if problem persists 285 88 xx Color cartridge critically low 285 88 xx color cartridge low 285 88 xx color cartridge nearly low 284 Adjusting color 269 an error has occurred with the USB drive 269 Change paper source to custom string 270 Change paper source to custom string load orientation 270 Change paper source to custom type name 269 Change paper source to custom type name load orientation 270 Change paper source to paper size paper type 270 Change paper source to paper size paper type load orientation 270 Close tray door 271 Close finisher side door 271 Close finisher top cover 271 Close front door 271 Close left side door 271 Close paper transport cover 270 Close top access cover 271 Disk corrupted 271 Disk near full Securely clearing disk space 271 Disk problem 271 Empty the hole punch box 272 Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator 272 Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator 272 Fax Station Name not set up 272 Fax Station Number not set up 272 Insert hole punch box 273 344 Insert staple cartridge 273 Insert Tray x 273 Install bin x 273 Install envelo
401. y and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Note To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing device use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for USB attach Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC regulations Modular component notice This product contains the following modular component s Lexmark regulatory type model LEX M01 003 FCC ID IYLMO1003 IC 2376A M01003 Notices 322 Licensing notices The following documents can be viewed from the installation software CD Directory File CD LEGAL FW_License pdf mDNS tar gz Expat txt Inst_lib txt Instgui txt Instgui zip Noise emission levels The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296 Not
402. you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode 3 Touch Submit Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 71 Using Hibernate Mode Hibernate is an ultra low power operating mode When operating in Hibernate mode the printer is essentially off and all other systems and devices are powered down safely Note The Hibernate and Sleep modes can be scheduled Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Sleep Button Settings 3 From the Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button drop down select Hibernate 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button gt Hibernate 2 Touch Submit Adjusting the brightness of the display To save energy or if you have trouble reading your display then adjust the brightness of the display Available settings range from 20 100 The factory default setting is 100 Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you d
403. ze Type 148 Paper Texture 152 Paper Weight 154 Parallel x 169 PCL Emul 231 PDF 230 PostScript 231 Quality 226 Reports 160 Security Audit Log 177 Serial x 171 Set Date Time 178 Setup 221 SMTP Setup menu 173 Standard Network 161 Standard USB 167 Substitute Size 152 Supplies 146 TCP IP 164 Utilities 229 Wireless 166 XPS 230 342 menus diagram 145 Miscellaneous menu 175 moving the printer 252 253 moving your printer 19 multipurpose feeder loading 80 My MFP 31 N Network x menu 161 Network Card menu 163 network options 33 Network Reports menu 163 network setup page printing 56 Networking Guide where to find 254 noise emission levels 322 notices 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 O options 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder installing 53 550 sheet tray installing 53 fax card 33 firmware card 40 firmware cards 33 flash memory card 40 Internal Solutions Port installing 42 memory card installing 38 memory cards 33 network 33 order of installation 52 ports 33 printer hard disk installing 46 printer hard disk removing 51 updating in printer driver 57 options touch screen copy 110 111 112 113 139 e mail 118 119 120 fax 132 133 FTP 138 139 140 scan 143 scan to computer 143 144 ordering cleaning kit 247 print cartridges 246 staple cartridges 247 Index waste toner bottle 247 ordering a print cartridge 246 output file type changing 117 P pape
404. ze and Paper Type settings are the same for any trays the trays are automatically linked Loading paper and specialty media 83 The printer automatically senses the Paper Size setting according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the standard 550 sheet tray and the multipurpose feeder The printer can sense A4 A5 JIS B5 Letter Legal Executive and Universal paper sizes The multipurpose feeder and trays using other paper sizes can be linked manually using the Paper Size menu available from the Paper Size Type menu Note To link the multipurpose feeder Configure MP must be set to Cassette in the Paper menu in order for MP Feeder Size to appear as a menu item The Paper Type setting must be set for all trays from the Paper Type menu available from the Paper Size Type menu Unlinking trays Note Trays that do not have the same settings as any other tray are not linked Change one of the following tray settings Paper Type Paper Type names describe the paper characteristics If the name that best describes your paper is used by linked trays assign a different Paper Type name to the tray such as Custom Type x or define your own custom name Paper Size Load a different paper size to automatically change the Paper Size setting for a tray Paper Size settings for the multipurpose feeder are not automatic they must be set manually from the Paper Size menu Warning Potential Damage Do not assign a Paper Type

User's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents